Home

Denon AVR-4806CI User's Manual

1. Auto Preset Memory Block 4 A ESA TFM 87 5 O mzani ona Auto Preset Memory Ar eee tame Preset Skip A3 89 TOM ON Block 4 A gt i A n Am 98 10MHz ON Preset Skip ETA g Preset Name A2FM 89 10MHz A4FN107 90MHz ON kee pete ASA 90 10MHz ON GPreset Name A4RITOT 90M AGN 90 10MHz ON EE Exit M 90 10MHz ATAN 90 10MHz ON MEM uir Aan 90 ous ON Exit ATH 90 10MHz Aan 90 10MH Press the CURSOR or V button to select the preset channel you want to skip then press the Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or preset channel whose name you want to OFF change then press the CURSOR lt or gt button e The screen switches to the character input screen 3 7 Preset Skip Block 4 A gt DREIWEN Emo Example When A1 is selected and the CURSOR lt or A2FM 89 10MHz ON gt button is pressed A3FM 98 10MHz ON A4FM107 90MHz ON P t N AS 90 10MHz ON Pepper Name AGF 90 10MHz ON ATM 90 10MHz ON Y ann 90 TOM ON J TAIM 87 ROM When the CURSOR V button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen e The screen for the next preset memory block Default appears E 3 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to move the MERN ip cursor Bi to the
2. First screen Press the ENTER button e Switch to the second screen Example Speaker Config Check Speaker Config Check GE Surround Sp A q Y EY SE None Sp B c SEI None 98 Sp Back 2348 E SEI None lspkr Second screen If the check ends press the ENTER button again Press the CURSOR or V button to select whether or not to save the data you have checked Store Set with the checked measurement value All parameters are stored up Cancel Cancel the auto setup settings 1 1 Auto Setup Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check Stored Cancel 24 e When measurements Press the CURSOR lt button e After the data is stored the Auto Setup Room EO menu screen appears automatically Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually Sometimes due to interaction with the room you may notice irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main speakers If this happens THX recommends setting them manually Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small 80 Hz If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup please make sure manually that any THX
3. A N m gt O NI SEN Best VERA yaki yari D AUDIO IN DO R OPTICAL DT Q IN sl OPTICAL A 9 OUT Al AUDIO OUT i NS A NOTE e When recording to DVD recorder it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR A4806CI VCR 1 to 3 OUTPUT terminal Example TV IN S Video cable VCR 1 to 3 OUT S Video cable TV IN Video cable VCR 1 to 3 OUT Video cable e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 2 OUT terminal on the AVR 4806CI s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 2 IN terminal 31 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a VCR e There are three sets of video deck VCR terminals so three video decks can be connected for simultaneous recording or video copying Video deck D ETa or O O D ir D VIDEO O ie i d LI IN GJ e d H O CH SE Al AUDIO IN De R Al AUDIO OUT L gt R M T NOTE When recording to VCR it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR 4806CI VCR 1 to 3 OUTPUT terminal Example VCR 1 IN S Video cable VCR 2 OUT S Video cable VCR 2 IN Video cable VCR 1 OUT Video cable e Do not connect the out
4. PROGRAMMABLE A REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT SYSTEM REMOTE ZONES AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable ROOM TO ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM separately sold control line X Refer to Connections I page 40 90 Advanced Operation Multi zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals L When using the power amplifier as the ZONE2 ZONE3 output When the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONES output channel at Power Amp Assign in the System Setup Menu the MAIN ZONE speaker terminals can be used as the ZONE2 or ZONES speaker out terminals ES page 116 117 System configuration and connections example Using external amplifier as the ZONE2 and using this AVR 4806CI internal amplifier as the ZONES MAIN ZONE 5 1 channel systems Monitor FL FR DVD player EA AVR 4806CI SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 MULTI ZONE SPEAKER OUT ZONE3 eee VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT ZONE2 AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 91 System configuration and connections example Using this AVR 4806CI internal amplifier as the ZONES and using external amplifier as the ZONE2 MAIN ZONE 5 1 channel systems Monitor FL DVD player
5. l SF Extension terminals for future use RC 616 RC 617 INFRARED INFRARED RETRANSMITTER SENSOR NOTE e For the AUDIO output use high quality pin plug cables and wire in such a way that there is no humming or noise e For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices refer to the devices operating instructions 40 Connecting Other Sources ZONE2 ZONE3 speaker out connections e When the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONES output channel at Power Amp Assign in the System Setup Menu the MAIN ZONE speaker terminals can be used as the ZONE2 or ZONES speaker out terminals ES page 116 117 e The connections diagram below is an example for when the surround back speaker is assigned to the ZONE2 stereo 2 channel In this case Surround Back Speaker OUT can not be used for MAIN ZONE Front right speaker Center speaker Surround right speaker A Subwoofer Front left speaker Connection terminal O for subwoofer with built in amplifier subwoofer etc Surround left speaker A Surround right speaker B ZONE2 Front right speaker ZONE2 Front left speaker Surround left speaker B 41 Con
6. Surround for subwoofer with Surround right speaker built in amplifier left speaker A subwoofer etc A We Surround Surround back Surround back Surround right speaker B right speaker left speaker left speaker B e Precautions when connecting speakers NOTE If a speaker is placed near a TV or video monitor the e When using only one surround back speaker connect it colors on the screen may be disturbed by the speaker s to left channel magnetism If this should happen move the speaker away to a position where it does not have this effect 16 Easy Setup and Operation Connecting a DVD player and TV Monitor To connect the video output from the DVD player to the AVR 4806CI you only need to choose one connection type Component video connection offers the best quality and is required for progressive DVD playback followed by S Video while composite video offers the lowest picture quality of the three connection types For more information about the video up conversion function ES page 27 e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with HDMI connectors so it can be connected to a DVD player or TV monitor using an HDMI cable To connect it to a DVD player using a DVI D cable ES page 36 e To connect the digital audio output from the DVD player you can choose from either
7. 2 Tune by preset UpjDown CHB5 FM105 50MHz TP search e Use this function to find RDS SEARCH stations broadcasting traffic program TP stations Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION Gees ICH Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER mode Ka Remote control unit Press the RDS SEARCH button until TP SEARCH appears on the display RDS B New tuning sy your conve 1 Push RDS Search RDS RDS station PTYF Program category Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset CHB5 F105 50MHz stem for nience Down Up y X The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display Basic Operation FUNCTION CURSOR lt I gt STATUS Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the TP search operation RDS Search New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search RDS RDS station PTY Program category SO Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset UpjDown f no TP station is found with above operation all the reception bands are searched The station name is displayed on the display after Searching stops
8. Start playback on the selected component e The DSD indicator lights ele Lights aa Xx For operating instructions refer to the component s manual DSD DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD 2 channel signals in the DIRECT mode DSD MULTI DIRECT is displayed when playing DSD multi channel signals in the DIRECT mode SB CH OUT SSES 94 Multi source recording playback L Playing one source while recording another REC OUT mode Press the ZONE3 REC SELECT button until RECOUT SOURCE appears on the display e The REC indicator lights Turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you wish to record Set the recording mode x For operating instructions refer to the manual of the component on which you want to record I e To cancel turn the FUNCTION knob and select SOURCE e Recording sources other than digital inputs selected in the REC OUT mode are also output to the ZONE3 audio video output terminals e When the REC OUT mode is selected the ZONE3 button on the remote control unit cannot be operated e When ZONE2 SELECT is selected at Digital Out Assign the source switches in association with the ZONE2 SELECT mode for the OPTICAL2 OUT terminal 128 page 121 95 Advanced Operation L Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel sources With this set it is possible to record Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel signals converte
9. ees AVR 4806CI FR LS gt Q lp SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 MULTI ZONE SPEAKER OUT ZONE3 AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PROGRAMMABLE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable ROOM TO ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM separately sold control line SPEAKER cable X Refer to Connections 1277 page 41 Advanced Operation FUNCTION ZONE3 REC SELECT ZONE2 ON OFF TIL ones ON OFF ZONE2 SELECT ET VOLUME wu 7T Outputting a program source to an Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE2 room amplifier etc in a ZONE3 room ZONE2 SELECT mode ZONE3 SELECT mode 1 Press the ZONE2 SELECT button to display the Press the ZONE3 REC SELECT button to ZONE2 SOURCE on the display display the ZONE3 SOURCE on the display he MULTI indicator light Turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to output appears on the display The display switches as follows each time the button a is pressed 3 Start playing the source to be output ZONES 9I x For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the 2 Turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source Fespe clvercompone nts you want to output appears on the display 3 Start playing the source to be output Xx For operating instr
10. Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround only with digital input 1 Press the STANDARD button to select STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround mode 2 Play a program source with the DUE EIS mark The Dolby Digital indicator lights EE when playing Dolby Digital xe qas sources lights The DTS indicator lights when UE playing DTS sources PS lights Press the SURROUND BACK button Lights when the Surround Back CH is on XI po Sb sell Set to 1spkr Em pg e Set to 2spkrs FREIER lights lights 3 Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button Display the Surround Parameter menu Dolby Digital EX G ONEMALEO lt Ts 7 NEO 6 mm s1CINEMA E Q 4 OFF gt E EQ OFF wg LFE 08 TONE 4 4 5 AFDM prp IS RS TONE id n SB CH OUT AFDM jor an 4MTRX ON a y SB CH OUT Default Yes P 4ES MTRX gt L Default Yes 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 54 e When Default Yes is selected and the CURSOR lt button is pressed CINEMA EQ and D COMP are automatically turned off LFE is reset and TONE is set to the default value L Surround parameters 3 CINEMA
11. Decoding these signals with Dolby Pro Logic makes it possible to achieve multi channel surround playback The signals can also be played on ordinary stereo equipment in which case they provide normal stereo sound There are two types of DVD Dolby Surround recording signals 2 channel PCM stereo signals 2 channel Dolby Digital signals L Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the logo mark shown below Dolby Surround support mark DC pousy surround Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 4 Dolby Headphone e This is a three dimensional sound technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd of Australia for achieving surround sound using regular headphones Previously when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long periods of time Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a room and places the sound at the front or the sides outside the head to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters This technology is mainly for multichannel audio video equipment with Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and works with a high performance digital signal processing DSP chip Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel
12. e When playing PCM digital signals or analog signals in the DOLBY PRO LOGIC II DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx DTS NEO 6 modes and the input signal switches to a digital signal encoded in Dolby Digital the Dolby Surround mode switches automatically When the input signal switches to a DTS signal the mode automatically switches to DTS surround L Surround parameters 5 DTS NEO 6 Mode Cinema This mode is optimum for playing movies Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same atmosphere with 2 channel sources as with 6 1 channel sources This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well because the in phase component is assigned mainly to the center channel C and the reversed phase component to the surround SL SR and SB channels Music This mode is suited mainly for playing music The front channel FL and FR signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there is no loss of sound quality and the effect of the surround signals output from the center C and surround SL SR and SB channels add a natural sense of expansion to the sound field CENTER IMAGE 0 0 to 1 0 default 0 3 The center image parameter for adjusting the expansion of the center channel in the DTS NEO 6 MUSIC mode has been added The Dolby Headphone The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack while in the DOLBY DTS SU
13. lt q then press the CURSOR lt button 5 4 Manual EQ 6 4 Manual EQ Curve Flat Default Yesa Base Curve Copy Base Curve Copy cie No Adjust CH L R CH gt Exit Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Manual EO screen reappears 5 4 Manual EQ Flat Default Yes4 Base Curve Copy GAdjust CH L R CH X The type of the copied correction curve is displayed in the upper right of this screen e f the Auto Setup procedure has not been performed this item is not displayed 114 Advanced Setup Part 1 Option Setup e Make other expert settings Setting the Channel Setup e W ch ith this setting it is possible to change the number of annels played in the different zones according to the Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the zone then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the channel setting purpose Main Zone This configures the AVR 4806CI according to whether or e Surr B not you have surround B speakers connected and Not Used whether or not you have surround back SB speaker s Select if you do not have speakers connected to connected Surround B The number of channels output from the pre out terminals Used exclusively for ZONE2 and 3 can be set to Mono or Select if you have speakers connected to Surround Stereo according to the method of playback in the ge various multi z
14. the standby mode After checking the above check the connections of the external controller Operation is possible 39 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals Turn the DC 12V voltage on and off for the individual functions and surround modes For details see Setting the Trigger Out I page 119 TRIGGER OUT DC 12V 250mA MAX baci Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals x For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE functions 1257 page 90 93 ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre out connections e f another power amplifier or pre main integrated amplifier is connected the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre out variable fixed level terminals can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3 the same time CS page 92 93 e The ZONE2 or ZONE3 video out is only for the ZONE2 or ZONE3 When a sold separately room to room remote control unit DENON RC 616 617 or 618 is wired and connected between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 ZONES the remote controllable devices in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 ZONE3 using the remote control unit TV Monitor ZONE2 or ZONE3 El Ci S VIDEO oo 70 E IN Vi Power amplifier ZONE2 or ZONE3 D F4 qe Ja R INPUT OUTPUT EMOTE CONTROL IROOM TO ROOM AUX OUT 4
15. P e Canceling night mode Press the NIGHT button again e The night mode only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital e When the night mode is set to ON the D COMP surround parameter can not be selected Basic Operation SURROUND STANDARD ENTER PARAMETER CURSOR Dolby Pro Logic IIx Pro Logic II mode e To play in the PLIIx mode set Sp Back at the Speaker Configuration setting to 1spkr or 2spkrs To play in the PLIIx mode set Surround Back at the Power Amp Assign setting This mode is optimal for playing program sources recorded in Dolby Surround 1 Press the STANDARD button to select Dolby Pro Logic IIx mode The Dolby Pro Logic indicator a Ss Ms lights DOPRO LOGIC II A ES The mode switches as shown ighe below each time the STANDARD button is pressed DOLBY PLIx DTS NEO 6 Play a program source For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e Display the Surround Parameter menu OLBY PLIIx D OD umm CINEMA CINEMAJE Q 4 0FF WS Si E D COMP orb TONE 4 t 9m SB CH OUT am 94 gt OFF Default Yes4 56 r STANDARD ENTER Di S CURSOR SURROUND _ PARAMETER Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the play mode X
16. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Attachments Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards Water and Moisture Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and the like Accessories Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand tripod bracket or table The product may fall causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer s instructions and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer A product and cart combination should be e a moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combi
17. 10037 10217 10218 10264 10282 11156 11170 10030 10032 0056 0145 0178 0359 0481 0548 0744 10044 10109 10165 10356 10480 10516 10719 11145 11481 1 1576 10499 10828 18 Home Electronics Hongmei Hongyan Hornyphon Hoshai Hua Tun Huafa Huanghaimei Huanghe Huanglong Huangshan Huanyu Huagiang Huari Huodateji Hyper Hypson Hyundai beria CE Ces mperial mperial Crown ndiana nfinity nFocus ngelen ngersoll nno Hit nnova nnowert nteq nterbuy nterfunk nternal ntervision PRESET CODE 10606 10009 10264 10012 10282 10009 10009 10009 10009 10009 10009 10216 10264 10145 10051 10009 0037 10668 0037 10037 0216 10216 0037 10630 0001 10037 10054 10752 10163 10009 10009 10282 10037 10865 10017 10037 0012 10275 10037 0009 10247 10455 0011 10045 10102 10157 10200 10238 10320 10374 10093 10412 10037 10145 10817 10264 10264 10412 10264 10216 10264 10714 10698 10217 10218 10163 10009 10361 10037 10290 10247 10037 10361 10037 0264 0486 10012 10070 10104 10163 10206 10247 10356 10512 10264 10817 10848 10817 10412 10374 10412 10217 10282 10715 10706 10218 10247 10264 10487 10072 10516 10264 1008
18. 30053 30000 31208 30420 30888 20029 20283 20076 20029 20076 20074 20308 20439 20353 20029 20029 20070 20244 21309 20070 20375 20308 20029 20009 20099 20283 20029 20135 20027 20308 20229 20029 20337 20027 20029 20029 20027 20029 20009 20074 20231 20337 20029 20375 20170 20439 20109 20280 30420 30100 SIZ 20197 20439 20371 20309 20375 20229 20182 20071 20273 20071 20309 20029 20439 20136 20220 20309 20229 20099 20220 20190 20029 20371 20234 20243 20291 21313 20283 31364 20200 21315 21311 21471 20375 20439 20375 21314 20337 20282 20337 20439 20353 20289 20308 20309 20274 20303 20304 20310 20092 20233 20234 21364 2022021506291 34 Technics Thorens Universum Victor Wards Wharfedale Yamaha PVR x1 ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DirecTV Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP 20229 20353 20029 20375 20439 20244 20273 20274 20027 20029 20439 20094 20097 21972 21972 21972 Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush iBUYPOWER Linksys edia Center PC Microsoft ind Niveus Media orthgate Panasonic Philips RCA ReplayTV Sonic Blue Sony Stack 9 Systemax Tagar Systems Tivo Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo ZT Group TV DVD Com
19. Calculate then press the CURSOR lt button e The speaker system is analyzed 1 1 Auto Setup a Please place microphoni IA SHOE at ear height at Calculating listening position Calculated OK Next 4 Retry4 Cancel C A The amount of time required for the analysis depends on the number of speakers and the number of measuring points The greater the number of speakers and measuring points the longer the time required For example for ten speaker systems and 6 measuring points the calculations require approximately 6 minutes Measurements can be ended when there are 5 or less measurement locations however to obtain better results measurements at 6 or more locations is recommended Once the calculations are completed a screen for confirming the results of the measurements appears Easy Setup and Operation Check of the measurement result e The results of the measured items can be checked 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select items then press the ENTER button e Switch to the verification screen Example Speaker Config Check 1 1 Auto Setup EFSpeaker Config Check Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check Comm Front Sp Large I Y E Center Sp Store Cancel Sie None Subwoofer No
20. O 440 O x x 440 O XII 91907 Odd 49100 x x x x x x x 440 O US L S VIN3NIO XH L 3INOH x x x x x x xX 440 O Y9Z VIN3NIO XH L 3INOH x x x x x x x 440 O N3349S 30IM x x x x X Xx x x NI HO IANN O E E x x E x x NI 1X3 x x x x x x x 440 O O3831S gt x x x x x x x 193810 HO INNAN x x x x x x x x 193810 MAN asa E P3 x x x B x x 193810 OSC x x x x x O x 440 O 193810 193810 38Nd 39VINI HLGIM apow LIV MS Y3LN3O Y3LN3O NOISN3INIG VINVHONVd HONO LHOIN Ajuo GOW us30omens AL AY BG epo A punoung Ajuo NI DA SISNW 9 03N Ajuo 3g0W ISNAN XII II 91907 Oud leubig Aqioq sesayjuaied ul UMOYS eie senje 1 nejep 1e1euueJed sepouu 1ue1eyJip eui ul Aujiqeisnfpe pue sjeuBis 158 Additional Information x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x m SISNW XITId NI UI x Oi x x Gi x x x x x x E x x x x Cx VWANIO XIFld NI LIA x e x x e x x X X x x x x x x x 1 H9 UI HO LENIN O x O O x O x x x x x x x x O O 91901 Old 49100 O x O O x O 94 x x x x x x x O e 3IAV9 II 91901 Od 49100 O x O o x O x x x x x x x x O O JISNW II 91901 Od 49100 O x O x O x x x x x x x x O e VIN3NIO II 91901 Old A9100 O x O O x O x x x x x x x x O O JWY9 XII 91901 04d 49100 O x O O x O x x x x x x X x O O JISNW XII 91901 04d 49100 O x O O x e x x x x x x x x O O VWANIO XII 91907 Od 49100 x x x xX x
21. Playing audio sources CDs and DVDs 2 channel playback modes e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with three 2 channel playback modes exclusively for music e Select the mode to suit your tastes L PURE DIRECT mode This mode reproduces the sound with extremely high quality When this mode is set all circuits and processes not required for the selected input source FL tube video circuit and tone control as well as digital circuitry and other unnecessary circuits for analog audio inputs are automatically turned off so the music signals can be reproduced with high sound quality Press the PURE DIRECT button to select the PURE DIRECT mode L DIRECT mode Use this mode to achieve good quality 2 channel sound In this mode the audio signals bypass such circuits as the tone circuit and are transmitted directly resulting in good quality sound Press the DIRECT STEREO button to select the DIRECT mode x The mode switches as shown below each time the DIRECT STEREO button on the main unit is pressed DIRECT lt SIEREO When press SURROUND PARAMETER The subwoofer output can be controlled directly 50 HOME THX CINEMA PURE DIRECT c DIRECT STEREO ENTER P ert p CURSOR SURROUND 4 O 9 ON SCREEN PARAMETER L STEREO mode Use this mode to adjust the tone and achieve the desired sound Press the DIRECT STEREO button to select the STEREO mode P e The system setup function cannot b
22. Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits When installing an outside antenna system extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal Overloading Do not overload wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Damage Requiring Service Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged b If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product c If the product has been exposed to rain or water d If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an
23. The volume level is displayed on the master volume level display 44 Basic Operation Playback using the external input EXT IN terminals Turning the sound off temporarily MUTING Press the EXT IN button on the main unit or INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit to switch the external input When operating the remote control unit Remote control unit x The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT MODE button is pressed gt AUTO gt PCM gt DIS EXT IN ANALOG lt Cancelling the external input mode Press the INPUT MODE or ANALOG button to switch to the desired input mode 127 page 47 The external input mode can be set for any input source To watch video while listening to sound select the input source to which the video signal is connected then set this mode e f the subwoofer output level seems too high set the SW ATT surround parameter to ON NOTE When the input mode is set to the external input EXT IN the surround mode DIRECT STEREO HOME THX CINEMA STANDARD 7CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN or DSP SIMULATION cannot be set n play modes other than the external input mode the signals connected to these terminals cannot be played In addition signals cannot be output from channels not connected to the input terminals Use this to mute the audio output temporarily Press the MUTE button x
24. elemaster lelesat elestar elesystem eletech eleves elevisa elewire Tempo Tevion Thomson Thorn Tioko 01847 00132 00879 01409 00210 00136 00123 01300 00369 00713 00132 01143 00887 00455 01225 00455 01143 01225 00592 00114 00548 01283 01143 01429 00132 0101 001 0024 010 0011 006 00421 u an C P Y 00243 00750 00520 00605 00114 01334 00396 00114 00132 00887 00592 01143 00713 00115 00710 01012 00455 00132 01848 00369 01105 00417 00243 01283 01227 00157 00863 01206 00607 01284 00605 01043 00396 00834 00157 01251 00880 00455 01334 00292 00711 01046 00243 00421 00520 00613 00853 01147 01158 01159 01300 00369 00642 00794 00829 01251 01322 00200 00396 00455 00501 01099 01100 01195 01322 00607 00501 00607 00613 00692 00501 01099 01100 01251 00501 01214 01300 01409 00392 00455 00607 00668 00713 00820 00847 00853 01175 01291 01498 01900 31 Tivo Tokai Tonna Topfield Toshiba TPS Triad Triasat Triax Trio TT micro Turnsat Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat United Universum US Digital USDTV Van Hunen Variosat Vega Ventana Vestel Victor Visionic Visiosat Vivid Voom Vortec VTech Welltech We
25. 00853 01246 00856 00136 00345 00847 01335 01099 01298 01159 00299 00607 01111 00720 00879 01162 01173 00871 00501 00713 00794 00863 01209 00299 00369 00396 00417 01161 01214 00592 00692 00834 00853 OO OA Ol 01284 00887 00417 00885 00455 00501 00571 00750 00853 00879 01150 01291 01435 01100 00369 00396 00397 00501 00668 00710 00882 01012 SONAS Hitachi 00455 00489 00819 01250 01284 01518 Kathrein 00114 00115 00123 00173 00200 00249 01523 01525 00035 00331 00358 00442 00480 00553 00613 Hnsel amp Gretel 00132 00658 00713 00742 00818 00898 01057 Homecable 00238 01221 01561 01567 Homecast 01214 athrein Eurostar 00115 Houston 00396 00592 00668 enwood 00853 HTS 00775 01775 ey West 00132 00794 Hughes 00749 iton 00114 Hughes Network Syst lap 00668 00710 00749 olon 00421 Hughes Network Systems onig 00607 00749 01142 01442 01443 01444 01749 oscom 00834 01043 01334 01409 Humax 00863 01176 01225 01427 01568 osmos 00331 00442 Huth 00132 00243 00607 00692 00794 00829 R 00592 00613 01017 01075 reiling 00114 00249 00658 01461 01480 Hwalin 00885 reiselmeyer 00173 Hypson 00136 00417 yostar 00421 00613 Hyundai 01011 01075 01159 L amp S Electronic 00132 00369 01043 01334 iCan 01367 Labgear 01296 D Digital 01176 LaSAT 00115 00132 00157 00173 00243 00299 EEC 00605 00369 00
26. 10036 10157 10217 10362 10480 10618 10885 10264 10363 10217 10018 10030 10060 10156 10186 10320 11037 10037 10163 10247 10370 10492 10631 10070 0170 0264 0411 0512 0668 10668 11037 10653 11755 10320 10418 10356 10418 10019 10020 10047 10051 10080 10096 10165 10166 10187 10866 10394 10579 23 Weipai Welltech Weltblick Westinghouse Weston Wharfedale White Westinghouse Windsor Windstar Windy Sam Wintel World of Vision Worldview Xenius Xiahua Xianghai Xiangyang Xiangyu Xihu Xinaghai Xingfu Xinghai Xinrisong XLogic XMS Xoceco Xrypton Xuelian Yamaha Yamishi Yapshe Yingge Yokan Yoko Yongbao Yonggu Yoshita Youlanasi Yousida Yuhang Zanela Zanussi Zenith Zenor ZhuHa Zonda ZX PRESET CODE 10009 10714 10217 10003 10037 10037 10037 10623 11037 10282 10556 10714 10880 10455 10634 10009 10817 10009 10264 10009 10264 10412 10009 10264 10848 10698 10698 10779 10037 10848 10019 10217 10250 10009 10037 10009 10264 10848 10009 10706 10817 10009 10009 10238 10206 10016 10208 10009 10003 10418 10320 10889 10264 10186 10337 10661 10264 10412 10412 10785 10030 10282 10109 10037 10339 10848 10264 10017 10339 10374 10698 10556 10706 10861 10216
27. 10087 10264 10218 10206 10247 10581 10218 10264 10282 10359 10714 10037 10355 10668 10171 10412 10180 10650 10282 10247 11437 10018 10093 10451 10767 10556 10104 10264 10320 11037 10163 10216 10218 10371 10418 10443 10714 11037 10177 10218 10264 10433 10516 10581 10250 10628 10700 10292 10370 10428 10019 10030 10052 10108 10178 10179 10628 10879 10633 10714 10715 11 Audiosonic Audioton Audiovox Autovox Aventura Awa Axxent Axxon Baihe Baile Baird Bang amp Olufsen Baohuashi Baosheng Barco Basic Line Bauer Baur Baysonic Bazin Beaumark Beijing Beko Belcor Bell amp Howell BenQ Beon Berthen Best Bestar Bestar Daewoo Binatone Black Diamond Black Panther Black Strip Blaupunkt Blue Sky Blue Star PRESET CODE 10009 10337 10715 10217 10003 10875 10087 10171 10009 10216 10606 10009 10714 10009 10001 10072 10087 10264 10009 10380 10009 10374 10805 10009 10535 10180 10217 10178 10001 10412 10037 10606 10019 10016 11032 10032 10668 10337 10037 10374 10217 10556 10102 10035 10036 10535 10037 10556 11254 10282 10037 2103707 10264 10092 10206 10011 10217 10698 10264 10009 a LOOTS 10565 10412 10817 10037 10455 10037
28. 10238 10320 10019 10021 10047 10051 10178 11347 10163 10216 10030 10032 10092 10096 10247 10370 10774 11661 10012 10017 10030 10032 10080 10087 10187 10191 10374 10423 10774 11154 10216 10320 10080 10087 10037 10039 10038 10109 10361 10423 10760 10866 10339 10714 10092 10374 10516 10412 10761 10108 10367 11310 10163 10508 11410 10264 10817 10412 10821 10370 10027 10056 10030 0060 10282 10320 10037 0145 0418 10054 0178 0451 10019 0037 10092 0193 0556 1454 10486 10193 10706 10163 0428 10020 0051 0108 0200 0690 1756 10216 10712 10166 0486 10715 10783 10815 19 Prinz Prism Profex Profex Fidelity Profi Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosonic Protech Proton ProVision Pulsar Pye Qingdao Quadral Qualcraft Quasar Quelle Questa R Line Radialva Radiola Radiomarelli RadioShack Radiotone Rank Arena RBM RCA Realistic Recor Rediffusion Reflex Relisys Reoc Revox PRESET CODE 10194 10051 10009 10102 10009 10037 10037 10625 10047 10037 10009 10247 11037 10001 10056 10037 10017 10012 10556 10051 10218 10039 10009 10650 10011 10512 10032 10037 10218 10012 10037 10019 10056 10009 10648 10036 10070 10000 10051 10178 11047 11547 10019 10165 10037 10036 10037
29. 10412 10053 10463 10731 10264 10037 10264 10009 10264 10163 10163 10714 10290 10698 10282 10371 10193 10480 10208 10480 10374 10036 10721 10761 10412 10226 10412 10412 10054 10817 10556 10817 10093 10508 11253 10412 10216 10556 10264 10412 10206 10264 10371 11661 10455 10208 10544 10339 10548 10051 10815 10817 10817 10848 10145 10821 10634 10193 10576 10817 10217 10374 10361 10282 10339 10346 10548 10610 10346 10361 10606 10610 10092 10156 10817 10156 10264 10218 10371 10606 10653 10218 10282 10661 10817 10421 10606 Kendo ennedy ennex enwood IC ingsley iota ioto Kiton LH 218 loss neissel olin Kolster ongque Konichi onka Kontakt orpel Korting otron Koyoda raking Kriesler TV Kuaile ulun Kunlun yoshu yoto L amp S Electronic LaSAT Leader Lecson Legend Lemair Lenco Levis Austria Leyco PRESET CODE 10037 10428 10206 11037 10019 10217 10216 10001 10054 10037 10765 10037 10024 10037 10411 10036 10102 10009 10009 10037 10628 10714 10816 10487 10037 10087 10264 10009 10238 10012 10030 10009 10009 10051 10817 10032 10032 10714 10486 10009 10037 10009 10032 10037 10037 10037 10102 10512 10435 10030 a MOZA 105
30. 40525 41061 40741 40785 40869 41404 41107 41265 40778 40833 40792 40768 40774 40790 40804 40703 41362 41462 41490 40646 40675 40854 41158 41354 41165 40571 40631 41086 Powtek 40852 Shinco 40717 Prima 41016 Shinsonic 40533 40839 Prinz 40831 Silva 40831 Prism 40705 Silva Schneider 40831 Proline 40651 40672 40833 41004 Singer 40690 40768 Proscan 40522 Skantic 40539 40713 41003 Proson 40713 Skymaster 40730 40768 Prosonic 40752 Slim Art 40784 ProVision 40699 40778 Slim Devices 40533 Owestar 40651 SM Electronic 40690 40730 40768 Radionette 40741 40869 Smart 40705 40713 RCA 40522 40571 40717 40769 40790 40822 Sonai 40755 41022 41132 Sonashi 40831 REC 40490 Sonic Blue 40783 40869 41099 Recco 40698 Sony 40533 40573 40864 41033 41431 41533 Red Star 40770 41003 Soundmaster 40768 Reoc 40752 40768 Soundmax 40768 Resonance 40651 Soundwave 40783 Revoy 40699 Sova 41122 Rio 40869 Spectra 40872 RJTech 41360 Standard 40651 40768 40831 Roadstar 40690 40699 40713 40730 40833 41051 Star Cluster 40768 Ronin 40872 Strong 40713 Rotel 40558 40623 Sungale 41074 Rowa 40516 40717 40823 40872 41004 Sunkai 40770 40850 Saba 40651 40769 Sunstech 40831 Sabaki 40798 Superscan 40821 Saivod 40831 Supervision 40768 Sakyno 40768 SVA 40672 40717 40860 41105 Salora 40741 Sylvania 40630 40675 40821 41268 Sampo 40698 40752 Symphonic 40675 Samsung 40490 40573 40744 40
31. HB5 F105 50MH Basic Operation XM Satellite Radio e AVR 4806CI is the XM Ready receiver You can receive XM Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Passport System sold separately and subscribing to the XM service L Introducing XM Satellite Radio There s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM XM Satellite Radio Select from over 170 channels of music news sports comedy talk and entertainment Coast to coast coverage Digital quality sound With all music channels 10096 commercial free Questions Visit www xmradio com How to Subscribe Listeners can subscribe by visiting XM on the Web at www xmradio com or by calling XM s Listener Care at 800 967 2346 Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready The Radio ID can be found by selecting channel 0 on the radio U A Warning Against Reverse Engineering It is prohibited to copy decompile disassemble reverse engineer or manipulate any technology incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system Furthermore the AMBE voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems Inc The user of this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy decompile reverse engineer or disassemb
32. O Router A router is a device for connecting multiple pieces of equipment computers the AVR 4806Cl etc to the Internet simultaneously When using the AVR 4806CI we recommend a router equipped with the following functions Built in DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server Function for automatically assigning the device s IP address on the LAN Built in 100BASE TX switch When connecting multiple devices it is recommended to have a built in switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater NOTE The type of router that can be used differs for different ISPs For details contact your ISP or a computer store L Ethernet cable CAT 5 The AVR 4806CI does not come with an Ethernet cable Purchase one of the required length Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise We recommend using a normal type cable If the sound is broken in an environment with the electric products subject to much power noise or a noisy network environment use a shielded type Ethernet cable This could improve the sound Basic Operation L Personal Computer Install Windows Media Connect on your computer The required system for forming a music server is as described below 1 OS Operating System WindowsQ XP Service pack2 2 Processor Intel PentiumIl or AMD processor etc We recommend 1 GHz or greater 3 RAM Min 128 MB we recommend 256 MB or greater 4 Software NET Framework 1 1 5 In
33. Press the HOME THX CINEMA button to select Home THX Cinema mode Dates DIGITAL Em Play a program source with the mark The Dolby Digital indicator lights e eeu when playing Dolby Digital ED um SOUrCeSs lights e The DTS indicator lights when playing DTS sources alive SC Xx For operating instructions refer to lights the manuals of the respective components The channel status information during playback of Dolby Digital and DTS sources can be checked pressing the STATUS button on the main unit Press the SURROUND BACK button Lights when the Surround Back CH is on ibe Slee SI IL ai In lights Set to 1spkr e id e Set to 2spkrs a lights L Surround parameters 2 MODE SB CH OUT Select the surround back channel playback method or mode 1 Multi channel source THX Surround EX Dolby Digital signals are played in the THX Surround EX mode Ultra2 Cinema The signals are played in the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode Music Mode The signals are played in the THX Music mode Games Mode The signals are played in the THX Games mode NON MTRX The same signals as those of the surround channels are output from the surround back channels MTRX ON The surround channel signals undergo digital matrix processing and are output from the surround back channels SB OFF OFF No signal is played from the surround back channels ES MTRX When playing DTS signals the surround back sign
34. Stop gt Play lt lt 1 Auto search cue il Pause x Default setting SAT The preset codes of a CABLE can be recorded in the SAT CBL mode so that the cable device can be operated It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the SAT or CBL 84 3 Video deck VCR system buttons RC 1036 SRC ON Power on SRC OFF Power off lt lt gt gt Manual search forward and reverse D Stop gt Play lt lt BPI Auto search to beginning of track L Pause SETUP Setup MENU Menu A V ak Cursor up down left and right ENTER Enter DISP Guide CH Switch channels 0 9 10 Number 4 Monitor or TV system buttons SRC ON SRC OFF SETUP MENU A Y ak ENTER DISP CH 0 9 10 TV VCR e m ra Du RC 1036 Power on Power off Setup Menu Cursor up down left and right Enter Guide Switch channels Number Switch between TV and video player x When there are codes usable for the preset device those codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed If not by default the DVD codes are punched through If the punch through setting is made after the preset memory is set the codes are sent with priority lt lt gt gt a Le laa 1 H Manual search forward and reverse Stop
35. gt button The Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired radio station then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button Playback starts 2 77 Basic Operation L Deleting radio stations from your favorites At the screen on which the Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed press the CURSOR A or V button to choose the radio station you want to delete then press the MEMORY button e The delete screen appears Is it deleted lt Remove Cancel gt Press the CURSOR 1 button to delete the station To cancel without deleting press the CURSOR gt button Character search function searching by first letter e The character search function searching by first letter can be used to select the desired item from the menu screen displaying the list of Internet radio stations or music files stored on the computer While the menu screen is displayed press the TUNING A or Y button e The character search screen appears Press the TUNING A or Y button to select the first letter of the item you want to search for e After several seconds the menu screen is displayed with the cursor set to the item starting with the letter selected in step 2 Character Search GA f there is more than one item starting with the letter Selected in step 2 the items are displayed in alphabetical
36. or to speakers that are set to LARGE for systems with no connected subwoofer s Press the CURSOR or V button to select Crossover Frequency at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Crossover Frequency screen 2 Speaker Setup 2 5 Crossover Frequency DG Fixed gt THX Speaker Config Subwoofer Setup Delay Time Channel Level Crossover Frequenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup 1 2 8 4 G5 6 T Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the frequency FIXED THX Set to the THX rated 80 Hz crossover frequency VARIABLE 40 60 80 90 100 110 120 150 200 250 Hz Set as desired according to your speakers bass playback ability Advanced The crossover frequency can be set individually for the different speakers 130 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears e f LFE Main is set at Subwoofer Setup SW LFE Main IZ page 126 127 is displayed at the top right of the screen GR Crossover Frequency SW LFE Main GIA gt THX a y e Please set all THX Certified speakers to small and the crossover to 80 Hz We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to FIXED THX but depending on the speaker setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency Th
37. po punong q3 olpny Jedns OIGNV dAG TWALISIG Ag 1OQ sia sjeuBis indu uonng sjeuBis 3ndui ay uo Buipuadap saweu apow punoJns u se2uaJagq E 159 Additional Information SUON 40 AASL 01198 SI Jayeeds 39eq punouns usym pajoajes eq 10uueo epouu si sjeuBls jeuueyo z uey 19470 sjeuBis indul 104 yy pe Aejdsip s O3H31S HOG U9u1 SUON O Jes si dnies 1exeeds 19eg punouns eui J Ex QUON Jo det 01 195 si dnies Jexeeds xoeg punoung eui ueuM ejqejie e Jou s POW SIU Wa 9UON 01 18S si dnjas 1exeeds xoeg punouing eui ueuM e qejieAe Jou si epouJ SIYL Ly LON epoui ejgei2e es uON x epoui ajqejoajas O NO S WO U8U pexy PON snjejs en ul ul ejqey2ejes OPON e O e e O O O O O O O O O O 9 e 034318 034318 O O O O O O O O O O O 9 O O O O x 034315 HO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O XIELVIA O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Q O 3IAV9 0301A O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O JINOIN ONO Q Dp O O O O O O O O 1439N09 9ISSVTO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O amo ZZvr O O O O O O O O O O e O O VN3uV 1908 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O WAIGVLS u3dns O O O e O O O O G Si O O O e 43498 201 OLIVINWIS SO x O x x a x x x P3 pa x x x x x x Lx OISNW XIFld 0 3ufd x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x Cx VIN3NI XIMd 0 38fid x O x x O x x x
38. 1 Dolby Surround D Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is the multi channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories Dolby Digital consists of up to 5 1 channels front left front right center surround left surround right and an additional channel exclusively reserved for additional deep bass sound effects the Low Frequency Effects LFE channel also called the 1 channel containing bass frequencies of up to 120 Hz Unlike the analog Dolby Pro Logic format Dolby Digital s main channels can all contain full range sound information from the lowest bass up to the highest frequencies 22 kHz The signals within each channel are distinct from the others allowing pinpoint sound imaging and Dolby Digital offers tremendous dynamic range from the most powerful sound effects to the quietest softest sounds free from noise and distortion U Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic Comparison of home surround Dolby Digital Dolby Pro Logic systems No recorded 5 1 ch 2 ch channels elements No playback 5 1 ch ach channels Playback channels LR L R C SL SR SW max SW recommended Digital discrete processing Dolby Digital encoding decoding Analog matrix processing Dolby Surround Audio processing High frequency playback limit of 20 kHz 7 kHz surround channel 147 Additional Information L Dolby Digital compatible media and playback meth
39. 10093 10178 IIS 10264 10290 10618 10644 10774 10812 20 Sanyo Sanyuan SBR Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scimitsu Scotch Scotland Scott Sears Seaway Seelver SEG GEI Sei Sinudyne Seleco Semivox Semp Sencora Sentra Serino Shancha Shanghai Shaofeng Sharp Shen Ying Shencai Sheng Chia Shenyang Sherwood Shintoshi Shivaki Shogun Shorai PRESET CODE 10011 10036 10108 10145 10159 10180 10280 10339 10508 10544 10893 11154 10009 10093 10012 10037 10037 10361 10714 10012 10037 10247 10259 10556 10648 10019 10178 10163 10019 10178 10047 10054 10159 10171 10556 10634 11037 10009 10036 TOZI Woz As 10668 11037 10087 10102 10037 10087 10163 10206 10363 10371 10180 10156 11356 10009 10035 10093 10455 10264 10412 10009 10208 10848 10145 10817 10009 10030 10093 10157 10386 10491 10720 10818 10003 10009 10009 10145 10009 10093 10009 10264 10009 10037 10037 10178 10019 10179 10045 10146 10208 10370 10555 10817 10193 10374 10070 10361 10668 10179 10056 10178 10037 10264 11163 10177 10102 10259 10411 10610 10817 10226 10032 10696 10374 10165 10516 10851 10092 10264 10179 20759 10072 10154 10216 10381 10556 10556 10486 10163 NOS 10714 10180 10146 10179 8
40. 10544 10009 10482 28102927 10714 10154 11756 10037 10370 10370 10587 10170 10218 10606 11437 10109 10217 10218 10264 10374 10428 10180 10217 10036 10264 10785 10412 10374 10193 10217 10556 10146 10208 10661 10370 10715 10418 10421 10374 10614 10191 10282 10668 10428 10486 10451 10247 10037 10374 10661 10208 10218 10668 10361 10226 10812 10418 11037 OS 10195 10455 10714 10486 10714 10623 10802 10544 10108 10412 10157 10512 10217 10282 11037 10339 11163 10455 10512 10264 10817 10428 10374 10821 10486 10200 10455 10487 10499 s Mags TIOS Bondstec Boots Bosch Boxlight BPL Bradford Brandt Brandt Electronique Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Caihong Cailing Caishi Candle Canton Carad Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Celestial Centrex Centrum Centurion Century CGE CGM Changcheng Changfei Changfeng Changhai Changhong 10247 10009 10320 10752 10037 10180 10109 10335 10037 10087 10216 10019 10003 10087 10218 10009 10218 10363 10581 10714 10009 10748 10891 10030 10218 10037 10037 10030 1
41. 11137 10217 10218 10698 10773 10320 10339 10473 10480 10287 10335 10820 10548 10826 10872 10433 10581 0285 10412 10556 10236 10443 10606 10218 10264 10157 10191 0361 10218 OP 10512 11137 10411 10418 10264 11077749 10377 Panama Panashiba Panasonic Panavision Panda Pathe Cinema Pausa Peng Sheng Penney Perdio Phase Philco Philex Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Pionier Plantron Playsonic Polaroid Polytron Polyvision Portland Powerpoint Prandoni Prince Premier Prima Princess Princeton Prinston 10037 10001 10037 10208 10516 11650 10037 10009 10508 10826 10163 10009 10891 10003 10032 10135 0037 10032 10486 10009 10037 10765 10282 10697 10019 10037 10361 10037 10009 10817 10698 10700 11037 0019 10056 10180 10463 10193 0000 10024 10054 10178 10238 10721 10037 0012 0019 0011 10170 10512 10217 10051 10226 10548 10411 10051 10698 10848 10216 10018 10039 10156 10072 0020 10087 10186 10628 10548 0009 10027 10056 10186 10361 10772 10087 0037 0030 0037 10287 10679 10217 10865 10697 10039 10487 10363 10264 10264 10717 10247 10264 10054 10055 10250 10361 10650 10853 10208 10226 10706 10780 10891
42. 20035 20037 XR 1000 20000 20035 20072 Teleavia 20041 Yamaha 20038 20041 Telefunken 20041 20067 20209 20240 20278 20320 Yamishi 20072 20278 20642 Yokan 20072 Telestar 20037 Yoko 20037 20240 Teletech 20000 20072 20278 Yoshita 20072 Tenosal 20072 Zenith 20000 20033 20039 20209 20479 21479 Tensai 20000 20072 20278 ZT Group MISA Tevion 20209 20348 20642 ZX 20209 20348 Texet 20278 Thomas 20000 TV Thomson 20041 20060 20067 20278 20320 888 10264 10412 Thorn 20037 20041 20104 A Mark 10003 Tivo 20618 20636 20739 21503 A R Systems 10374 10455 TMK 20240 Abex 10032 Tokai 20037 20072 Accent 10009 Topline 20348 Acura 10009 Toshiba 20041 20042 20043 20045 20067 20081 Addison 10092 10108 10653 20209 20432 20845 21008 21145 21289 Admiral 10087 10093 10163 10264 10363 10463 21323 21503 21972 Advent 10761 10783 10815 10817 10842 Totevision 20037 20240 Adventura 10046 Touch 21972 Adyson 10032 10216 10217 Towada 20072 AEA 10037 Tradex 20081 AEG 10606 Triad 20278 Agashi 10216 10217 Uher 20240 AGB 10516 Ultravox 20278 Agef 10087 Unitech 20240 Aiko 0009 10037 10092 10216 10217 10264 United 20348 Aim 0045 10208 10264 10339 10374 10412 Universal 20209 10455 10606 10706 10753 10805 Universum 20000 20037 20081 20104 20209 20240 Aiwa 10163 10701 10705 10848 20315 20348 Akai 0009 10030 10035 10037 10060 10072 Vector 20045 10163 10178 10191 10208 10216 10217 Vector Re
43. BSR Burmester Bush Cairn California Audio Labs Cambridge Carrera Carver CCE CDC CEC Classic Condor Copland Crown Cyrus DAK 00123 00668 01075 00369 00123 01300 00887 00692 00114 00742 01334 00856 01173 00396 00243 30420 30018 30155 30032 30012 30156 30157 30194 30018 30437 30157 30170 30157 30157 30157 30164 30194 30420 30245 30157 30029 30157 30194 30157 30157 30420 30174 S1297 30164 30893 30122 30157 30245 00668 01412 01856 00613 00794 30234 30124 30766 30245 30303 30179 30420 30194 00832 00668 00713 00847 01214 01323 00115 00321 00331 00369 00520 00818 01075 01191 01232 01251 30157 31690 31688 30437 32 DBX Denon DKK DMX Electronics Dual Dynamic Bass EEG Elektra Emerson Fisher Garrard GE Genexxa Goldmund GoldStar Goodmans GPX Grundig Harman Kardon Hitachi nkel ntegra ntersound R JVC enwood LH odak orsun Oss rell yocera LG Linn Loewe Luxman LXI agnavox Marantz ark Mark Levinson atsui McIntosh CS Memorex eridian Micromega iro PRESET CODE 30018 30254 30003 30626 30766 30873 31234 31867 31868 30000 30157 30003 30179 30194 30437 301155 30088 30245 30009 30032 30157 30417 30245 31296 30157 SOTS 30032 30180 30101 30245 30000 30
44. Cineral 40730 Cinetec 40713 cineULTRA 40699 CineVision 40833 Citizen 41277 Classic 40730 Clatronic 40672 Clayton 40713 Coby 40730 41115 40794 40796 40797 Compacks 40826 41056 41061 41100 Conia 40516 Continental Edison 40768 Craig 40831 Crown 40690 41071 41072 41121 Curtis Mathes 41087 Cybercom 40831 CyberHome 40816 Cydectin 41074 Cytron 40651 D Vision 41115 Daenyx 40872 Daewoo 40705 40884 41169 Daewoo International 40872 Dansai 40770 40713 40769 40778 Dantax 40539 Daytek 40872 Dayton 40872 DCE 40831 DES 40774 Decca 40770 Denon 40490 1 PRESET CODE 40672 40730 41165 41087 41004 41061 40869 41730 41165 40770 41165 41265 40672 40831 40769 40874 40774 40770 41172 40783 40713 40778 41115 40634 40690 40695 40699 40713 40778 40831 40833 40884 40876 40778 40852 41086 41107 41177 41351 40798 40852 41004 40770 41115 41023 41024 41117 41129 40784 40833 40869 40872 41234 41242 41115 40790 41089 41470 41634 Denver 40699 Desav 40770 Desay 40800 Diamond 40651 Dick Smith Electronics 40833 Digihome 40713 digiRED 40717 Digitor 40651 Digitrex 40672 DIGIXmedia 40826 Dik 40774 Disney 40675 DiViDo 40705 DK Digital 40831 DMTech 40783 Dragon 40831 DSE 40833 Dual 40651 41068 Durabrand 40713 DVD2000 40521 DVX 40768 ECC 40730 Electrohome 40770 El
45. Even with the high quality multi channel signals the recording time is the same as with conventional DTS Surround sources What s more DTS 96 24 is fully compatible with the conventional DTS surround format so DTS 96 24 signal sources can be played with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz on conventional DTS or DTS ES surround decoders X 2 1 A DVD player with DTS digital output capabilities for CD LD players a player with digital outputs for conventional DTS CDs LDs and a disc recorded in DTS 96 24 are required X2 The resolution is 24 or 20 bits depending on the decoder 151 Additional Information b Home THX Cinema Surround THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world renowned film production company Lucasfilm Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theaters and in your home theater as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions The soundtrack created for movie theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home
46. HDMI DVI In Assign Component In Assign Video Convert Mode HDMI Out Setup Audio Delay On Screen Display FExit Advanced Setup Part 1 Advanced Playback e Makes more detailed audio playback settings Setting the 2ch Direct Stereo e Set this when you want to change the speaker settings when the surround mode is set to the 2 channel Direct or Stereo mode 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Advanced Playback at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Advanced Playback menu screen System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ 5 Advanced Playback Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup 1 2ch Direct Stereo 4 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E m1 2 Dolby Digital Setup 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Option Setup Manual EQ Setup Network Setup xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select 2ch Direct Stereo then press ENTER button 5 Advanced Playback Gi 2ch Direct Stereo 2 Dolby Digital Setup 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Basic The Speaker Setup settings are displayed Custom The speaker settings for the 2 channel direct and stereo modes can be changed 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo M T a TER Direct Stereo Crossover THX Front Small Delay FL 12 Oft Subwoofer es FR 12 Oft Subwoofer Mode LFE THX 111 Press the
47. LARGE Ton op enter op Uowooter A B Sp peaker Gs ha 1 for full size full range to automatically set the composition 125 126 Configuration the signals output from the speakers and the f of the signals output from the speakers and the frequency Small Small Yes Small Small 2spkrs response 2 Hei This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals LFE THX 126 127 This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the Front Center Subwoofer Surround Surround Surround 3 Delay Time audio signals are produced from the speakers and L amp R L amp RIA L amp R B Back 127 128 subwoofer according to the listening position 12 ft 3 6 m 12 ft 3 6 m 12 ft 3 6 m 10 ft 3 0 m 10 ft 3 0 m 10 ft 3 0 m Channel This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the Front Front Gorter surround L Surroung p Surround Surround subwoofer 4 Level speakers and subwoofer for the different channels in order L R BackL Back R 128 130 to obtain optimum effects 0dB 0dB 048 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 5 Crossover Set the frequency Hz below which the bass sound of the FIXED THX 130 131 Frequency various speakers is to be output from the subwoofer Use this functi h i Itipl d speaker combinations for moro ideal surround Surround THX DOLBY THX DOLBY THX WIDE 7CH DSP MULTI CH Ge dons tor more eal Surround de DTS CINEMA DTS MUSIC DOLBY GAME SCREEN STEREO SIMULATION MODE S
48. Panasonic Pathe Cinema Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Polk Audio Portland Prinz Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosonic Protec PRESET CODE 21972 20240 20041 20240 20041 SIS 20209 20209 20000 20072 20035 20162 20642 20222 20037 20072 20002 21479 20000 20072 20209 20081 20000 21972 20037 20000 20035 21035 20043 20041 20035 21237 20042 20000 20000 20479 20000 20739 20278 20081 20037 20042 20081 20278 20000 20081 20000 20060 20278 20072 20042 20278 20067 20041 20209 20226 20048 20121 20037 20348 20041 20037 20162 21062 20037 20209 20035 20035 20067 20240 20278 21060 20046 20315 20320 20046 20278 20104 20184 20072 20642 20072 20072 20225 21308 20038 20038 20081 20081 20320 20048 20048 20315 20162 20209 20209 20642 20226 21562 20042 20072 20226 20162 20642 20081 20081 20348 20432 20348 20315 20614 20240 20209 20616 21562 20104 20104 21062 20479 20348 20616 21035 20226 20618 Protech ProVision Pulsar Pye Oisheng Quarter Quartz Quasar Quelle Radialva Radiola Radionette RadioShack Radix Randex Rank Rank Arena RCA
49. Predki Preisner Premier Premiere Prima Primacom PRESET CODE 00243 01232 00114 01283 00879 01334 00351 00114 01099 00497 00345 01205 00515 00200 00791 00887 00834 01111 00710 00299 00243 00157 01159 00615 00152 01304 00173 01011 00132 00724 00099 00571 00749 00887 01442 01273 00592 01339 01334 00292 00396 00442 00396 01123 00421 00132 00292 00292 00795 01111 00331 01412 00136 01143 00157 01100 00668 00241 00795 01175 00587 00396 00501 00879 00247 01320 00455 01159 00515 00133 00613 00750 00898 01749 00863 00329 00871 00396 00592 00723 00442 00417 00421 00329 00847 01323 01161 00421 00455 01404 00607 00668 00173 00668 00805 01076 01017 00352 00794 00873 00668 00592 00501 00455 00853 01356 00501 00500 01508 00834 00710 00200 00710 00818 01114 01200 00853 01101 01429 00834 00548 00497 00867 01423 00571 00701 01526 00292 00722 00853 01118 01308 01113 01043 00834 00720 00879 01623 00847 00455 00724 00856 01142 Pro Visat Prod Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton ProVision Pye Pyxis ONS Quadral Quelle Radiola RadioShack Radix Rainbow RCA Rea
50. gt button to select the digital input terminal Select from among COAX 1 to 3 OPT 1 to 5 If the same digital input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to OFF The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to the input source at HDMI DVI In Assign LES page 106 107 If an input source is assigned to a device connected with an IEEE1394 cable at IEEE1394 Assign the digital input terminal s assignment setting switches to ORF When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears P e The OPTICAL 2 3 and 4 terminals on the AVR 4806C s rear panel are equipped with an optical digital output terminal for recording digital audio signals to a CD recorder MD recorder or other digital audio recording deck Use this for digital recording between a digital audio source stereo 2 channel and a digital audio recorder PHONO and TUNER cannot be selected on the Digital In Assign screen Advanced Setup Part 1 L Setting the DENON LINK e When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure to make a setting to DENON LINK with the System Setup Digital In Assignment When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able to transferred by DENON LINK the unit automa
51. preset 21471 Advanced Operation 3 Tuner system buttons A Y BAND MODE MEM SRCH SFT CH A G 1 8 E N d lr q a eo i Geter DENON RC 1036 Tuning up down Switch between AM FM and XM bands Switch between AUTO and MANUAL Preset memory RDS search Switch preset channel range Preset channel up down Preset channel range Preset channel 82 IR segment 57 MODE SELECTOR NUMBER RC SETUP Preset memory e The included remote control unit RC 1036 can be used to operate devices of different brands by registering the preset number corresponding to the brand of your device e For some models the remote control unit or the device may not operate properly In this case use the learning function IF page 85 86 to store your device s remote control signals in the included remote control unit Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the component you want to preset x Presetting is not possible for the AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 TUNER and SYSTEM CALL modes Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds The top IR segment blinks twice Referring to the included List of Preset Codes 123 End of this manual press the NUMBER button to input the preset code a 5 digit number for the manufacturer of the component whose signals you want to store in the
52. than 2 seconds when in the play or pause mode playback stops and the previous menu screen reappears L Playing music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites e The same operations as for Internet radio stations can be used to preset music files or register them in your favorites and play them NOTE e Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten e When the operations describe below are performed the music server database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play the music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites eWhen the music server is stopped and restarted eWhen music files are deleted from or added to the music server e When using an ESCIENT server place ESCIENT before the server name Operating the AVR 4806CI using a browser e Internet Explorer can be used on the computer connected to the AVR 4806Cl over the network to operate the AVR 4806CI e Check the AVR 4806Cl s IP address ES page 123 beforehand and input this IP address in Internet Explorer to display the AVR 4806CI s control panel Operate in the same way as with normal Internet browsing to control the AVR 4806CI 79 Basic Operation L Examples of web control operation screens The settings of the setup items are the same as with normal operations Refer to System Setup Below are some examples of operation screens Function selection screen I
53. then connections using the regular video terminals yellow The flow of the video signals SS HDMI terminal HDMI DVI D terminals O OOQ terminals gt LK 6 SS Ee video feet O O terminals m o o 9 o o o 9 o S Video terminal Video terminal Video terminal This unit s input terminals only MAIN ZONE 480i 576i This unit s output terminals NOTE t is not possible to down convert from HDMI DVI input signals to the component S Video or composite video monitor output terminals Video down conversion to the MAIN ZONE s monitor output is only possible when the component video input resolution is 480i interlaced standard definition video NTSC format for North America or 576i interlaced standard definition video PAL format for Europe and other countries To set the video conversion function for the MAIN ZONE to OFF IGS page 107 27 Connecting Other Sources L The analog video to HDMI conversion function e The AVR 4806Cl s video up conversion function lets you output analog video input signals component 4801 5761 480p 576p 1080i or 720p S Video and composite video 480i 576i to the HDMI monitor output terminal e With the AVR 4806CI the resolution of the signal output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal can be selected CS page 108 109 The resolutions with which the monitor is compatible can be che
54. 0 m or less If you set an invalid distance a CAUTION notice such as screen right will appear In this case please relocate the blinking speaker s so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in highlighted line Step 4 1ft gt HONE Default Yes 4 Oft Oft Oft Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Speaker Setup menu reappears The AVR 4806Cl automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the listening room 128 Setting the Channel Level Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels is equal From the listening position listen to the test tones produced rom the speakers to adjust the level The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB C weighted slow meter mode on a sound level meter at the istening position f a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same Because adjusting the subwoofer level test tone by ear is difficult use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Channel Level at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Channel Level screen 2 Speaker Setup 1 2 8 GA Channel 5 6 t E 2 4 Channel Level Speaker Config Subwoofer S
55. 00515 01775 00369 00711 00675 00455 01194 01083 01170 01505 01205 01537 00269 00713 01170 01505 00421 00710 00421 00417 00863 00607 00132 00818 00613 00605 01291 00573 01293 MOMSOS RON 01775 01283 01637 00280 00396 00454 00775 00853 00871 01200 01323 01409 01775 00501 00692 00713 00713 00882 00885 00243 00299 00369 00880 00898 00668 00713 27 Foxtel Fracarro Freecom Freesat Fresat FTEmaximal Fuba Fugionkyo Galaxis Galaxisat Gardiner Garnet GbSAT GE Gecco General Instrument GF GF Star Globo GOD Digital GOI Gold Box Goldbox Golden Interstar Goldvision Gooding Goodmans Gradiente Granada Grandin Grocos Grundig Hanseatic Hantor Hanuri Hauppauge HB HDT Helium Hinari Hirschmann Hisense PRESET CODE 00455 01176 00421 00173 00882 00885 00331 01449 00115 00421 01105 00115 00863 00321 00818 01075 01214 00566 0127 5 00869 00834 01043 01087 00200 00775 00853 00292 01283 01017 00571 00455 00099 00455 00084 00243 00173 00805 01330 00605 00421 00520 01294 01214 01011 00607 00421 00173 00573 01085 01535 00497 01356 00668 00421 00369 00173 00573 00369 00879 01412 01043 01251 01775
56. 01175 DigiQuest 00863 BT 00515 00668 00710 DigitAll World 01227 Bubu Sat 00713 Digiturk 01076 Bush 01284 01471 DirecTV 00099 00247 00392 00566 00639 00724 BVV 00692 00749 00819 01076 01108 01109 01142 Cambridge 00501 00515 01377 01392 01414 01442 01443 01444 Canal Digital 00853 01609 01639 01640 01749 01856 Canal Satellite 00853 01339 Discoverer 00605 Canal 00853 Discovery 00668 00710 01480 CanalSatellite 00853 01339 Dish Network 00775 26 PRESET CODE gJ shpro stratel strisat MT R DNT Dream Multimedia DST Dune DX Antenna Echostar y RI o ElF Einhell Elap Elsat Elta Emanon Emme Esse eMTech Engel Eurieult Euro Eurocrypt EuroLine Europa European Europhon Eurosat Eu osky Eurostar Eutelsat Exator Expressvu Fagor Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Finlandia Finlux Flair Mate Force Fortec Star ish Network System 00775 00775 00084 00200 01075 00692 00200 01237 00421 00369 01530 00159 00610 01005 01467 00417 00132 00794 00587 00713 00200 00421 00369 01214 00713 00084 01278 00455 01251 00501 00794 00132 00243 00114 00501 00115 00713 00421 00775 00592 00157 00455 00501 00455 00397 00713 01101 01017 01005 01005 00885 00396 01437 00167 00668 01086 01477 00243 00668 00369 00871 01017 00136 00607 00299 00115 00607 00607
57. 10217 10017 10721 10886 10668 10216 10001 10056 10217 10455 10487 10009 10179 10360 10499 10634 11163 10037 10218 10053 10037 10714 10648 10037 10208 10363 0009 10455 11037 10163 10808 10706 10037 10779 10009 0036 10443 10672 IONS 10590 10037 10865 10706 10180 10027 10093 10287 11347 10072 10363 10163 10019 10019 10109 10247 10556 0032 0217 103717 10516 10661 10370 10056 10163 10045 10217 10473 10037 10579 10037 10487 10264 10869 10030 10047 10109 10135 10335 10451 11447 11454 10163 10217 10374 10218 10030 10030 10032 10154 10163 10290 10361 10606 10714 10035 10036 10218 10235 10374 10451 10556 10560 10668 10714 10421 10170 10339 10361 10072 10108 10226 10339 10516 10548 10163 10282 10610 10668 10070 10191 10535 10556 10508 10587 10891 11034 10715 10560 10698 10051 10178 10560 10361 10037 10178 10363 10037 10264 10480 10579 10808 10371 10146 10356 10320 10714 10195 10587 10055 10180 10625 10516 10039 10216 10377 10072 10335 10487 10630 11037 10487 10163 10359 10374 10715 10370 10630 10768 Haiyan Halifax Hallmark Hammerstein Hampton Hanimex H
58. 10320 10337 10463 10412 10698 10773 10779 10817 10650 10769 10833 10839 10455 10216 10217 10218 10247 10421 10363 10092 10178 10463 10779 CABLE ABC ADB Aichi Denshi Alcatel Allegro Americast Amstrad Antronix Archer Auna Austar Bell amp Howell Bell South 00003 00017 01063 01512 00896 00153 00899 01222 00022 00022 00277 00012 00014 00899 00237 01269 00315 00153 00797 01269 00276 Birmingham Cable Communications British Telecom Cable amp Wireless Cabletenna Cabletime Cableview Canal Plus Century Citizen Clearmaster ClearMax Comcrypt Comtronics Contec Coolmax Cryptovision Daeryung Digeo Digi Director Dumont DX Antenna Eastern Emerson Everquest Filmnet Focus Foxtel France Telecom Freebox Fujitsu Funai Galaxi Garrard 00276 00003 01068 00022 00448 00022 00443 00153 00153 00883 00883 00443 00040 00019 00883 00600 00008 01187 00637 00476 00637 01500 00002 00797 00015 00443 00400 01222 00451 01482 01497 00019 00008 00153 00665 00315 00277 00477 00877 01877 00040 00619 00817 00896 00007 00008 00011 00013 00014 24 GE Gehua Gemini General Instrument GMI Golden Channel GoldStar Goodmind Hamlin Hitachi HyperVision Hytex 13 Micro Jasco Jebsee Jerrold KNC Leon LG acab Magnavox aspro Memorex NET Moser otor
59. 10668 10145 10264 10817 10412 10817 10374 10053 10073 10335 10443 10163 10171 10363 10371 0072 10163 10363 10548 0070 10072 10179 10217 10492 10516 10631 10714 10236 0037 10072 10235 10238 10411 10531 10714 10808 0045 10047 10157 10159 10555 10072 10218 10087 10216 10320 10370 0037 10102 OS OZ 0037 10072 10217 10259 0163 10206 0179 10180 11977 10264 10412 10795 10361 10370 11756 10218 10374 10109 10548 10193 10412 10208 10087 10346 10556 10715 10163 10247 10544 11037 10072 10208 10264 10320 10370 10247 10163 10361 10217 10264 10817 10193 10560 10216 10512 10287 10102 0411 0606 0808 10208 0321 0556 10087 10217 10455 10421 10264 10179 10683 10683 10412 10238 10625 10264 10531 10346 10104 10473 10621 10216 10361 10587 10104 10370 10610 10499 10363 10186 10809 10556 14 GE GEC Geloso General General Technic Genesis Genexxa Gericom Giant Gibralter Gintai Go Video Goldfunk GoldHand GoldStar Gooding Goodmans Gorenje GPM Gradiente Graetz Gran Prix Granada Grandin Gronic Grundig Grunpy H amp B Haaz Haier Haihong PRESET CODE 10021 10092 10282 11147 10037 10009 10186 10009 10009 10009 10808
60. 10865 10714 10037 10361 10163 10102 81007727 10630 11347 a OZI 10037 10264 10003 OIE 10556 10019 10037 10208 10418 10051 10865 10037 ai05Sb 10036 10163 10337 10037 10087 10030 10154 10037 10668 197 10018 10060 10560 11147 10030 10178 10264 10346 10668 10544 10361 10321 10634 11447 10451 10102 10337 10009 10466 10714 10087 10226 10055 10070 10544 10217 10516 10032 10165 10264 11037 10602 10019 10090 10618 11247 10032 10180 10418 10361 11037 10363 10411 a MOE 10163 10418 10030 10644 10193 10264 10165 10104 10668 10556 OU 10178 10412 10753 10030 O99 10625 11347 10039 10548 10370 11037 10180 10056 10556 10668 10180 10486 10039 10374 10412 10247 10200 10039 10428 10038 10093 DOS 11447 10621 10714 10217 10668 10052 10412 10817 10250 10361 10047 10579 10047 10135 10753 11454 10154 Hex RFT Rhapsody Ricoh Rinex Roadstar Robotron Rover Rowa Rownsonic Royal Royal Lux Runco Ruyi Saba Saccs Sagem Saige Saisho Saivod Saka Sakyno Salora Salsa Sambers Sampo Samsung Samsux Sandra San
61. 3 4 5 3 1 CD DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 On AMP SYSTEM SETUP O ENTER screen display System Setup Menu 1 Au 2 Sp 3 Au 4 Vi 5 Ad 6 Op 7 Ne Exit to Setup Room EQ eaker Setup dio Input Setup deo Setup vanced Playback tion Setup twork Setup 3 Au GI D SE 3 1 4 F 5 1 6 7 T Exi dio Input Setup igital In Assign XT IN Setup nput Function Lev unction Rename EEE1394 Assign EEE1394 Auto Func uner Presets t J Digital In Assign uA Tase OPT4 COAX2 VAux OPT5 COAX3 OPT1 OFF OPT2 OPT3 OFF Defaul tjYes4 oociBROon m 97 MiSystem Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup Advanced Playback Option Setup UEFEx it CURSOR Display 1 Advanced Setup Part 1 On screen display and front display e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with an intuitive and easy to understand on screen display and is equipped with an alpha numeric front panel display tube that can also be used to check and adjust settings We recommend that you use the on screen display when you make system adjustments Some representative front panel and on screen display examples are shown below On screen display l Front display E No GL Auto Set
62. 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Default Yesa Base Curve Copy FAdjust CH L R CH gt Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the adjustment mode then press the ENTER button All CH All channels can be adjusted simultaneously L R CH The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be adjusted simultaneously Each CH The channels can be adjusted separately Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the speaker to be set Example When L R CH is selected Manual EQ G 4Front L R 63Hz 0 oa 125H 0 0d 250Hz 0 0d 500Hz 0 04 i TkHz 0 04 2kH 0 0d 4kHz 0 08 Guns 8kHz 0 08 16kHz 0 0d Xx The display changes as follows D Select the L R CH ELE 3 F SLA SRA gt ISBUSBRI ISUSA A B SLB SRB Y Y A Advanced Setup Part 1 2 Select the Each CH ELH FR SLA SRAF SLB SBRF gt SBLH SR A B gt SL A B HSRB Ee k 1spkr Xx When the surround back speaker setting is set to 1spkr at Speaker Configuration this is set to SS 3 Select the All CH In this case speaker selection is not performed x f a value is already set for the FL channel the data stored for the FL channel is displayed Pre
63. 4 Feet Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the desired unit Meters or Feet The Delay Time screen appears automatically Example When Feet is selected 2 3 Delay Time Set The Distance To Each Speakers Do You Prefer In Meters In Feet Meters 4 y 2 3 Delay Time gt Step 4 1ft umm Default Yes 4 a el EL 12 oft FR 12 Oft o C 12 Oft 060 y SW 12 Oft fa m e e Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the speaker to be set 127 Advanced Setup Part 2 4 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the distance between the center speaker and listening position Example When the distance is set to 10 feet for the center speaker 2 3 Delay Time Step 4 1ft Dn Default Yes 4 aus FL 12 Of ER 12 Oft o LEC ____ 10 om 098 SW 12 Of ADA The distance changes in units of 1 foot 0 1 meters or 0 1 foot 0 01 meters each time the button is pressed Select the value closest to the measured distance When Step is selected you can select the unit of 1 ft 0 1 m or 0 1 ft 0 01 m When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 20 ft 6
64. AUX c Function Lev input sources 0dB OdB 0dB 0dB 0dB OdB OdB OdB 0dB OdB OdB OdB 0 dB Function The names of the different input source can be changed as CDR S a A Net Rename desired and displayed on the display TUNER PHONO CD TAPE DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VAUX Audio 101 102 IEEE 1394 The connected IEEE1394 device can be automatically z a en 102 Assign identified to assign the input source 1EEE1394 Set the function for associating playback of the connected puc SEE Auto Func IEEE1394 device on or off Auto Function OF WW Al AN 87 5 89 1 98 1 107 9 90 1 90 1 90 1 90 1 MHz B1 B8 520 600 1000 1400 1500 1710 kHz 90 1 90 1 MHz Auto f f C1 C8 90 1 MHz Preset FM e are received automatically and DI D8 901 MHz 103 Memory stored in the memory E1 E8 90 1 MHz Tuner Presets Fl F8 90 1 MHz G1 G8 90 1 MHz Preset Preset channels that are not used often can be All preset channels OFF 104 Skip skipped Preset The preset channels can be given the names 104 105 Name you want Video Setup Video Setup Default settings Page T i i i DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 V AUX HDMI DVI In Ma HDMI or DVI input terminals are assigned for the Assign ifferent input sources 106 107 Select the HDMI audio signal playback method NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE Component This assigns the component video input terminals for the DVD VDP TV DBS VCR VCR2 VCR 3 VAUX vie In Assign diff
65. D Please place microphone at ear height at main listening position Speaker Detect Check OK Start Retry 4 Cancel4 J Press the ENTER button e Switch to the Speaker Detect Check screen ya Speaker Detect Check E Front Sp Yes No Sees Center Sp YES No D Subwoofer 9 ou ES No a ei m m First screen Check the results of the speaker detection then press the ENTER button Switch to the second screen E Speaker Detect Check Umm Surround Sp A a wg Fal No Sp B No Back No 8 BIS Tier J Second screen a ae E E D 60 y S If the check ends press the ENTER button again 22 NOTE e f the results are not as expected or if an error message i displayed select Retry and perform the measurement S S again For details on the error messages ES page 25 d If the results of remeasurement are still not as expecte or if an error message is displayed turn off the power Switch and check the speaker connections Then start the measurements again from the beginning Measurement is cancelled when MASTER VOLUME is operated while the Auto Setup is performed Speaker system measurement e With these measurements the Speaker Configuration Delay Time Channe
66. Daley MO T 128 Setingithexenannellllevel a 30 Setting the Crossover Red wenyi AA SH e Setting the crossover frequency individually for the le tee e Me 131 Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes AAA 181 132 Settings the THX Audio Setup e Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer LE e Surround Back Speaker Position settings a 133 Others Setup Seringitne Roo NES 34 SetinomceibireedlVIodelSeWbM M 35 Senine Hae METU SEEC ieee 135 Check the parameter System setup items and default values Advanced Setup Part 1 Navigating through the System Setup Menu 97 On screen display and front display 98 Audio Input Setup Se Himo ae gitanas o 99 e Setting the DENON LINK e Se kingine NS SEraulaye wars erageet eVe Setting the Function Rename Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment Iroubleshooting EE 141 142 Additional information sssss 143 162 Specifications ee ee ee 163 164 List of preset codes ii End of this manual Accessories Getting Started e Check that the following parts are included in addition to the main unit D Operating instructions scrinia 1 2 Warranty for North America model only 1 G Service station list tee ct 1 Power supply cord 1 8 Remote control unit BC 2102p1 1 O O LRE A
67. ENTER button 7 Setup Memory Lock 6 7 Setup Lock User Memory Setup Lock Exit Press the CURSOR button to select ON to lock the system setup settings then press the ENTER button 122 Advanced Setup Part 1 Network Setup e f you are using a broadband router DHCP function there is no need to make the settings at Setting the IP Address and Setting the Proxy since the DHCP function is set to ON in the AVR 4806C s default settings e f the AVR 4806CI is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function the network settings must be made In this case some knowledge of networks is required Setting the IP Address e Set this when OFF is set for DHCP 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Network Setup at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e The Network Setup screen appears System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ ToMgtwork Setup 1 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 T E GIP Address Proxy Option Setup Network Setup xit Network Option l Exit Press the CURSOR or V button to select IP Address then press the ENTER button e The IP Address screen appears 7 IP Address DHCP MN gt 7 IP Address 000 000 000 000 IP 192 168 000 0 Address Primary 000 000 000
68. EQ 1 4 Mi Auto Setup 4 Mic Input Select 1 2 Room EQ Setup 3 Direct Mode Setup G4 Mic Input Select 5 Parameter Check EE gt Exit Press the CURSOR 1 or button to select Mic or V AUX L Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 2 Check the parameter Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the speaker channel e The results of the measured items can be checked e The EO parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be If the check ends pressing the CURSOR or V checked 499 e This item is displayed after the measurement result of the button to select Exit then press the ENTER Auto Setup Room EQ is decided button e The EO Parameter Check screen reappears 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Parameter Check at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Parameter Check screen 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 1 5 Parameter Check Auto Setup 1 e ESpeaker Config Check 4 Mic input Select SE Press the CURSOR A or Y button to select A a AA EE Exit then press the ENTER button i SES CS e The Parameter Check screen reappears Exit Restore Yesj4 Exit 1 5 EQ Parameter Check 2 Press the CURSOR or V button to select the
69. Func screen 3 Audio Input Setup 3 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func Digital EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1 In Assign 2 3 4 5 IEEE1394 Assign G6 T E Auto Function IEEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON Select this to automatically play the device OFF Select this if you do not want to automatically play the device Xx n some cases settings may be required on your player Also refer to the player s operating instructions Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears U Auto Preset Memory e Use this to automatically search for FM broadcasts and store up to 56 stations at preset channels A1 to 8 B1 to 8 C1 to 8 D1 to 8 E1 to 8 F1 to 8 and G1 to 8 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Tuner Presets at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Tuner Presets screen 3 Audio Input Setup 3 7 Tuner Presets Digital EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1 In Assign 2 3 4 5 1EEE1394 Assign 6 7 E Auto Preset Memory Preset Skip IEEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit Preset Name Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Auto Preset Me
70. In Assign IG page 99 100 2 EXT IN Setup deeg ee 49 Page 100 H ad c ied t Lev Tu page 101 Function Rename mea 101 102 5 IEEE1394 Assign 2 ka g Page Ya M 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func icg Page 10 7 Tuner Presets ign page 103 Exit Es page 103 105 4 Video Setup hummmmmmmmmummmEHEEEEHEEHEHEHHERHEEHEEEEEHENHENEEHEREEEHEENEENHEEHEEEEEEENENNH m 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 4 es Page 106 107 Component In Assign junio page 107 Video Convert Mode rg page 107 HDMI Out Setup mme 1084 Audio Delay MES ER page Ne 109 On Screen Display 1 Lu Page 109 al page 110 Exit 5 Advanced Playback Gi 2ch Direct Stereo ente e Page 111 2 Dolby Digital Setup Le Page 112 CANA AAA Von 3 Auto Surround Mode UTD neg page 112 4 Manual EQ Setup rn z page 113 114 X Exit J m 7 Network Setup 6 Option Setup PU EEEE FIP Addres S mi Channel Setup 15 AAA 2 Power Amp Assign 2222221 116 117 Oe 3 Volume Control 118 4 Trigger Out ptis 119 Network Option i te 1G Page 123 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev IGE page 124 6 Digital Out Assign 20 IE page 124 7 Setup Memory Lock 31 121 V Exit V Exit Ji 121 122 Getting Started Listening to the radio TIET 65 anual tuning 66 Preset memory 66 Checking the preset stations E67 Scala 67 ADS recio Der SIV S
71. MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories It is licensed under US and National Patent Applications 20030235318 and 10 700 220 Additional U S and Foreign Patents pending MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories Inc All rights reserved HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital HDCD is an encoding decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing e HD 8 HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital and icrosoft are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Inc in the United States and or other countries HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation Inc This product is covered by one or more of the following In the USA 5 479 168 5 638 074 5 640 161 5 808 574 5 838 274 5 854 600 5 864 311 5 872 531 and in Australia 669114 Other patents pending DENON LINK DENON Digital Link High grade LPCM 24 bit 96 kHz 6 channel or 24 bit 192 kHz 2 channel digital input is possible when the AVR 4806CI is connected via a shielded twisted pair STP cable to a DENON DVD player that supports Denon Digital Link Since DENON Digital Lin
72. Multistar yryad Mysat EC NEOTION Netgem Netsat euhaus Neuling eusat Neveling Newton Next Level NextWave Nikko Nokia Nordmende Octagon OctalTV 00607 01075 00605 01225 01206 00243 00292 00132 01161 00713 00200 00818 00269 00084 00613 01279 00173 00501 00713 00299 01075 00713 00571 00455 00132 01232 00856 00642 00331 00200 00713 00496 01334 01322 00099 00501 00132 00587 01409 01161 00396 00869 01017 00200 00397 00873 01723 00421 00421 01294 01334 00501 00299 01232 00724 00132 00713 01282 00607 00369 00749 00200 00869 00879 01270 00887 00592 01232 00692 01143 00243 00455 01023 00455 00613 01505 00853 01334 01412 01283 01334 00243 00713 00794 00829 01519 00713 00520 00369 00713 01043 01075 00136 00243 00421 00520 00818 00885 01205 01215 00613 00713 01294 00607 00692 00713 00834 00713 00834 01279 01334 00573 00723 00751 00853 01223 01310 01311 01312 29 Okano Opentel Optex Optus Orbis Orbit Orbitech Origo OSAT Ouralis Oxford Pace Pacific Satellite Packard Bell Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panarex Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pilotime Pino Pioneer Planet Plasmatic Polytron Praxis
73. Network saving network in the standby mode ivi Option PC Language Select the language of the computer s OS eng 140 Troubleshooting If a problem should arise first check the following 1 Are the connections correct 2 Have you operated the receiver according to the Operating Instructions 3 Are the speakers and other connected components operating properly If this unit is not operating properly check the items listed in the table below Should the problem persist there may be a malfunction Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase Symptom Cause Measures Page Display not lit and sound not Power supply cord not plugged in securely e Check the insertion of the power supply cord 42 produced when power switch plug set to on e Speaker cables not securely connected e Connect securely 15 16 Display lit but sound not e FUNCTION knob position is not appropriate Switch to the proper position 44 rodiced Volume control set to minimum Turn volume up to suitable level 44 P e MUTING is on e Switch off MUTING 45 No digital signal is being input Properly select a digital signal input source 99 100 e AVR 4806C s video output terminals and Check that the connections are correct 17 18 monitor s input terminals are not properly 26 43 connected Nothing is displayed on monitor Monitor TV s input setting is wrong e Set the TV s i
74. Part 1 Setting the Digital Out Assignment User Memory e The optical digital output terminals on the AVR 4806CI s rear e The currently set settings system setup surround panel OPTICAL2 to 4 OUT normally function in association parameters etc can be stored in the memory The stored with the ZONE3 REC SELECT mode With this setting the settings can be called out when needed OPTICAL 2 OUT terminal can be used in association with the ZONE2 SELECT mode 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Setup Memory Lock at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select e Display the Setup Memory Lock screen Digital Out Assign at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Digital Out Assign screen Option Setup 6 7 Setup Memory Lock Channel Setup Power Amp Assign Volume Control Trigger Out Option Setup 3 4 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Le 6 T E 6 6 Digital Out Assign Channel Setup Power Amp Assign QM SEH GOPTICAL2 OUT DrIEBer Qu 4ZONE3 REC SELECT GUser Memory Digital Out Assign Setup Memory Lock xit Setup Lock UL Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select User Memory then press the ENTER button e Switch to the User Memory screen Zone2 3 Tone Ch Le Digital Out Assign Press the C
75. Play Auto search cue Pause 85 Advanced Operation IR segment MODE SELECTOR D 1 ory 1 x Er NUMBER ag RC SETUP Learning function e f an AV component is not a DENON product or if it cannot be operated via codes provided in the AVR 4806CI remote control s internal preset memory or if its codes cannot be successfully learned by the AVR 4806CI remote control then you should use the remote control that was supplied with that AV component to operate the component Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 5 button 9 7 5 to select Learning setup The IR segment blinks twice indicating the remote is in Learning set up mode Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the component you want to learned Xx Learning is not possible for the AMP ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes Advanced Operation Press the button that you wish to be learned e The display will go off and the unit will enter the learning standby mode If a button that cannot be learned is pressed the IR segment lights and the learning setup mode is cancelled X The HOME button cannot be learned Point the remote control units directly at each other and press and hold in the button on the other remote control unit which you want to learn e The display turns on again and the IR segment blinks twi
76. Realistic Reoc Replay TV Rex RFT Ricavision Roadstar Royal Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sampo Samsung Sanky Sansui Sanyo Saville SBR Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scott Sears Seaway SEG 20081 20278 20039 20000 20060 20046 20046 20035 20081 20037 20081 20037 20000 20037 20037 20041 20041 20000 20226 21035 20000 20104 20348 20614 20041 20072 21972 20037 20072 20039 20041 20209 20043 20037 20045 20039 20000 20479 20046 20209 20240 20081 20000 20000 20278 20043 20000 20104 20278 20072 20278 20081 20162 20048 20037 20035 20240 21060 20035 20616 20072 20067 20348 20046 20048 20240 20048 20041 21479 20047 20240 20278 20041 20037 20348 20045 20035 ADS 20081 20278 21035 20042 20048 20060 20149 20320 20432 20807 20880 20037 20046 20047 20048 20081 20240 20278 20320 20104 20348 21330 20642 20121 20184 20432 20739 20067 20072 20048 20067 20104 20315 20042 20072 20037 20042 20240 20278 20278 21014 20348 20642 20209 20348 20104 20159 20081 20240 20046 20047 9 SEl Seleco Semp Sentra Serie Dorada Sharp Shinco Shintom Shivaki Shogun Siemens Siera Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Smaragd Sonic Blue Soniko Sonitr
77. S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO x 1080p x x x x O 480p 720p x x COMPONENT x O 480i 576i x x COMPONENT x O 1080p x O VIDEO x O 480p 720p x O COMPONENT 1 x O 480i 576i x O COMPONENT 1 x O 1080p O x S VIDEO x O 480p 720p Oo x COMPONENT 2 x O 480i 576i O x COMPONENT 2 x O 1080p O O S VIDEO x O 480p 720p O O COMPONENT 2 an x O 480i 576i o O COMPONENT 2 o x x x HDMI x x x o x x O HDMI VIDEO 32 VIDEO VIDEO O x O x HDMI S VIDEO 2 S VIDE S VIDEO O x O o HDMI S VIDEO 2 S VIDE S VIDEO O O 1080p x x HDMI O O 480p 720p x x HDMI O O 480i 576i x x HDMI O O 1080p x O HDMI 1 O O 480p 720p x O HDMI 1 O O 4801 5761 x O HDMI Kal O O 1080p O x HDMI 2 DEO S VIDEO O O 480p 720p O x HDMI 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO 3 O O 480i 576i o x HDMI 32 S VIDEO S VIDEO 4 O O 1080p o O HDMI 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO O O 480p 720p Oo O HDMI 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO 5 O O 4801 5761 O O HDMI 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO 5 O Signal input x Not output X No signal 1 On screen display superimposed on video signal and output a da e POMI so valio 4 When i Analog to HDMI Convert function is set to ON the NOTE component video input signals are conver ed before being output SNO i 5 When the Analog to HDMI Convert function is set to ONT video input e The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with signals are output the following format NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4 43 PAL N EZ On screen display only dis
78. Satellite Radio 71 and 1 142 Additional Information Optimum surround sound for different sources There are currently various types of multi channel signals signals or formats with more than two channels L Types of multi channel signals Dolby Digital including Surround EX DTS including Surround ES DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Note on the above MUSE 3 1 and MPEG multi channel audio are not available to North American consumers same is true for Dolby s AAC Source here does not refer to the type of signal format but the recorded content Sources can be divided into two major categories L Types of sources Movie audio Signals created to be played in movie theaters In general sound is recorded to be played in movie theaters equipped with multiple surround speakers regardless of the format Other types of audio These signals are designed to recreate a 360 sound field using three to five speakers In this case the speakers should surround the listener from all sides to create a uniform sound field from 360 Ideally the surround speakers should function as point sound sources in the same way as the front speakers These two types of sources thus have different properties and different speaker settings particularly for the surround Dolby Digital DTS etc speakers are required in order to achieve the ideal sound Movie theater sound field List
79. Thorens 30157 Philips 30157 30287 30626 Thule Audio 30157 Pioneer 30032 30101 30305 30468 31062 31063 Tivoli Audio 31553 31087 Tokai 30164 30420 PMG 30164 Toshiba 31693 Polk Audio 30157 Traxdata 30626 Poppy 30164 Universum HOOKS SHOE 30137 Proceed 30420 Vector Research 30194 30417 Proton 30157 Victor 30072 QED 30157 Wards 30000 30032 30053 30087 30157 30179 Quad 30157 Yamaha 30000 30032 30036 30037 30170 30187 Quasar 30029 30888 31292 Radiola 30157 Yoko 30194 RadioShack 31075 Yorx 30461 RCA 30009 30032 30053 30155 30179 30305 Zonda 30157 30420 30468 30764 31062 Realistic 30155 30164 30175 30179 30180 30420 CDR Restek 30157 Classic SES Revox 30157 Denon 30626 30766 31868 Roadstar 30461 Fisher 31325 Roksan 30420 GPX 31296 Rotel 30157 30420 Harman Kardon 31202 Royal 30164 30420 JVC 30072 31294 SAE 30157 Kenwood 30626 Sansui 30157 30202 30305 LG 31208 Sanyo 30087 30179 30342 Marantz 30626 SAST 30157 NAD 31208 Scott 30155 30164 30305 Philips 30626 Sears 30305 Pioneer 31062 31087 33 PRESET CODE RCA Sony TDK Teac Yamaha TAPE Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Garrard Genexxa GoldStar Grundig Harman Kardon Inkel JVC Kenwood LG Luxman agnavox Marantz emorex Mitsubishi yryad Onkyo Optimus Orion Panasonic Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Polk Audio Radiola RCA Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Siemens Sonic Sony TaeKwang Tandberg Teac
80. all surround modes Assign Sets the Equalizer individually for each surround mode When All is selected D Press the ENTER button 21 Display the Select the EO Curve screen 1 2 Room EQ Setup Select The EQ Curve Room EQ Audyssey 2 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the equalizer setting OFF The Equalizer is not used Audyssey Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics Front Adjusts the frequency response of the surround speakers to match the characteristics of the front channel speakers Flat Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to the flattest response This mode is suitable for multi channel music surround sound sources Manual Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EO Setup For details of the Manual EQ Setup ES page Ws MIA When Assign is selected After completing system setup select the 2 desired equalizer setting pressing the ROOM EQ button e Equalizer settings for the individual surround modes can be stored in the memory X Whenever the ROOM EQ button is pressed the display switches as shown below gt OFF Audyssey Front Manual lt Flat 4 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears P e The Equalizer setting of Audyssey Front and Flat can be selected
81. associated with traditional methods of room equalization In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a wide listening area Audyssey MultEQ XT provides a completely automated sound system set up process It identifies how many loudspeakers are connected to the amplifiers and whether they are full range satellites or subwoofers If there is a least one subwoofer connected Audyssey MultEO XT determines the optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the subwoofer s It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired out of phase relative to the others It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position and adjusts the delays so that sound from each loudspeaker arrives at the same time Finally Audyssey MultEO XT determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so that all levels are equal 153 Additional Information The two diagrams below illustrate two examples of microphone placement for two types of seating arrangements There are six measuring positions shown in each case Increasing the number of measuring points will provide a better sampling of the listening area and produce better results The dotted line represents the area in which the room correction provided by Audyssey MultEO XT is optimal The microphone must be placed at ear height at each location MULTEQ YA e Audyssey
82. aym agejlene si JazauueJed stu 3LON gP t 3798381 AP 9 SSVE TALON gp 0 318341 dP 9 SSV8 LILON Bumes uoneunBijuoo 1exeeds Aq jjo Jo uo peuin eiqeu x ejqeisn pe Jon euis ON x aqv o eiqeisnfpy eubis O x Se x x aP 0 O O x aP 0 O 440 O O XI8IVIN 01 O unipe O x x ap 0 O x gp 0 O 440 O 3IAVO O3GIA 01 O uunipeiw O x x ap 0 O O x gP 0 O 440 O O 3IAOIN ONOIN 01 O uunipeiN O x x ap 0 O O x ap 0 O 440 O O 1839NO9 DISSV19 01 O uunipeiN O x x ap 0 O O x gP 0 O 440 O O TI ZZVT OL O wnipaN O x x TILON O O x ap 0 O 440 O 5 VN3UV J909 01 O wunIps O x x L31ON O O x ap 0 O 440 O O WNIGVIS YIANS x x x x ap 0 O O x 8P 0 O 440 O O O3831S HOL x x x 440 O ap 0 O e NO O ap 0 O 430 O 9 O awnoguns SLA x x x 440 O aP 0 O 9 NO O ap 0 O 440 O O IVLIDIG Ad10d x x VIN3NID O 3LON O ap 0 O e x x 440 O O 9 O3N SIG x x WWANID O ILON O ap 0 O x x 440 O x O JI 1901 Odd 49100 x x VAINID O E3LON O ap 0 O O x x 440 O 9 O XI 919071 Od 49100 x x x x x O NO O aP 0 O x O u91 G VIN3NIO XH L 3INOH x x 9 xmMd O x x O x x x O Y9Z VIN3NIO XH L 3INOH OL NO O x x 440 O ap 0 O O x ap 0 O 440 O O N3
83. display is flashing with an interval of about 1 second and release your fingers from the 2 buttons e The microprocessor will be initialized rd e f step 3 does not work start over from step 1 e f the microprocessor has been reset all the settings are reset to the default values the values set upon shipment from the factory Advanced Setup Part 1 e You can customize a variety of system setup so that it may be fitting for your listening environment For the contents of a system menu and the initial setting of this unit 12857 page 138 140 Navigating through the System Setup Menu e You can change setting using the buttons on the front panel or remote control unit CURSOR ENTER eee SYSTEM SETUP Press the AMP button to select the AMP mode Press the SYSTEM SETUP button e The System Setup Menu appears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item you want to set then press ENTER button Press the CURSOR A or V again to select the item you want to set then press ENTER button To change the setting Press CURSOR A or V button to select the item you want to change then press CURSOR lt or button to change the setting Select Default Yes then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default setting Press the ENTER button and set a new item Press the SYSTEM SETUP button to return to the System Setup Menu or the main menu
84. e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a function for storing the selected input source the auto surround mode and input mode in the memory and selecting these settings when you want to use them e Three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory pressing the USER MODE buttons L Storing the settings in the memory The following are stored in the memory D Currently set input source 2 Currently set auto surround mode 3 Currently set input mode 2 Press and hold the USER MODE button for at least 3 seconds which you want to store the settings x n this case press the button and hold it in until the indicator of the selected USER MODE button lights L Calling the settings out Press the USER MODE button at which the settings you want to call out are stored The indicator for the selected USER MODE button lights The indicator turns off if you perform any operations that change the settings stored at the USER MODE buttons 60 Basic Operation DENON original surround modes e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a high performance DSP Digital Signal Processor which uses digital signal processing to synthetically recreate the sound field One of nine preset surround modes can be selected according to the program source and the parameters can be adjusted according to the conditions in the listening room to achieve a more realistic powerful sound Surround modes and their features WIDE SCREEN Select
85. features we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you review the contents of this manual before proceeding Getting Started Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals 35 Accessories ooo coco coeecooceeeeeoeeee eee 7 Connecting equipment with DVI terminals 36 Before using ETT Connecting 1EEE1394 dees o o AI 37 Cautions on installation E Connecting the antenna terminals EE 38 Cautions on handling 8 el ex Preparing the remote control unit 8 Connecting the CONTROL terminals aa seeeeereieeee 39 Inserting the batteries s 8 Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals 40 Operating range of the remote control unit 9 Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals Part names and functions ZONE2 or ZONES pre out connections Front panel 0 ZONE2 ZONES speaker out connections s Display 1 Connecting the pre out terminals cee SE 2 Connecting the power supply cord ocio Easy Setup and Operation Basic Operation ESOU 3 Playback Speaker system Layout 4 Operating Mete mot cono eee 43 Speaker connections icono ninia 6 iplavindstelimputesou co emm 44 Connecting a DVD player and TV Monitor E 8 Playback using the external input EXT IN terminals 45 Auto Setup Room EQ sss 9 Turning the sound off temporarily MUTING SS Conneci
86. fixed or variable ZONE MAIN All Surround Modes ON Trigger COR Out 1 TUNER PHONO CD APE DVD VDP DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VAUX AUX OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O This sets the Trigger Out output for the ZONE 2 Trigger Out different input sources Trigger COR ji j a Setup If ZONE MAIN is selected settings can be Out 2 TUNER PHON c TAPI W jy v Gala 113 made for the individual surround modes ON ON on ON ON O ON ON ON ON ON O ZONE 3 Trigger DR S T Out 3 TUNER PHONO CD TAPE DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR3 VAUX ON ON ON ON ON O ON ON ON ON ON ON 5 Zone2 3 Adjust the tone and channel level of the sound Zone Bass 0 dB Treble 0 dB HPF OFF L R 0 dB T Tone Ch Lev output from ZONE2 and ZONE3 Zone3 Bass 0 dB Treble 0 dB HPF OFF L R 0 dB Digital Out This sets the OPTICAL2 output for digital audio recording 6 Assign ZONES REC SELECT or ZONE2 SELECT i 121 User This stores the current user settings in the B 121 Setup Memory memory Memory Lock Setup This sets whether or not to lock the system Setup Lock OFF 122 Lock setup settings so that they cannot be changed p E Network Setup Network Setup Default settings Page IP Address The IP address related settings are made here ON 123 Proxy The proxy related settings can be changed here OFF 124 Power Set whether or not to accept control from the ON
87. improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation e If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way and When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition Wall or Ceiling Mounting The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other products including amplifiers that produce heat Getting Started Thank you for choosing the DENON AVR 4806CI AV Surround Receiver This remarkable component has been engineered to provide superb surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD as well as providing outstanding high fidelity reproduction of your favorite music sources As this product is provided with an immense array of
88. in terms of the size of the sound field not the actual size of the listening room L Surround parameters 6 EFFECT This parameter turns the effect signals with multi surround mode speaker effects on and off in the WIDE SCREEN mode When this parameter is turned off the SBL and SBR channel signals are equivalent to the SL and SR channels respectively LEVEL This parameter sets the strength of the effect signals in the WIDE SCREEN mode It can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15 Set this to a low level if the positioning or phase of the surround signals sounds unnatural SB CH OUT e ON Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker OFF Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker NOTE This operation can be performed directly pressing the SURROUND BACK button on the main unit s panel ROOM SIZE This sets the size of the sound field There are five settings small med s medium small medium med l medium large and large small recreates a small sound field large a large sound field EFFECT LEVEL This sets the strength of the surround effect The level can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15 Lower the level if the sound seems distorted DELAY TIME In the matrix mode only the delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 300 ms 63 Basic Operation Tone control setting Use the tone control setting to adjust the bass and treble as desi
89. is pressed Display 68 CURSOR lt ID gt RDS SEARCH CHANNEL A ei 2 enne eons D Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the RDS search operation 1 M i RDS RDS New tuning system for Search your convenience Push RDS Search RDS station PTY Program category TP Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset UpjDown Xx f no RDS stations is found with above operation all the reception band are searched Xx When a broadcast station is found that station s name appears on the display X To continue searching repeat step 3 If no other RDS station is found when all the frequencies are searched NO RDS is displayed 1 Push RDS New tuning system for your convenience RDS Search NOD RDS RDS station PIY Program category TP Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset Up Down B5 P105 50MH PTY search e Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program type PTY e For a description of each program type refer to Program Type PTY Set the input source to TUNER EN O Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode EN Remo
90. layers within these standards L AL24 Processing for All Channels DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing an analog waveform reproduction technology to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency of DVD Audio AL24 Processing Plus thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right center and subwoofer channels 155 Additional Information Windows Media Connect Windows Media DRM This is a media server provided free of charge by Microsoft since October 2004 It operates with all types of music jukebox programs but is optimum with Windows Media Player Ver 10 Windows Media Connect can be used to play playlists created on jukebox software such as Windows Media Player Ver 10 as well as WMA DRM WMA MP3 and WAV files O Explanation for Connect 1 If installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 is not yet complete either download free of charge from Microsoft or via the Windows Update installer 2 Download the latest version of Windows Media Player Ver 10 either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer 3 Download Windows Media Connect usable since October 12 2004 either directly from Microsoft or using t
91. pressed SURROUND A SURROUND B SURROUND A B This operation is possible when the setting for using both surround speakers A and B is made at Speaker Configuration ES page 125 126 46 LJ On screen display Press the ON SCREEN button Each time an operation is performed a description of that operation appears on the display connected to AVR 4806Cl s VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal Also the unit s operating status can be checked during playback Such information as the position of the input selector and the surround settings is output in sequence L Front panel display Press the STATUS button Descriptions of the unit s operations are also displayed on the front panel display In addition the display can be Switched to check the unit s operating status while playing a source L Using the dimmer function Use this to change the brightness of the display Press the DIMMER button Xx The display brightness changes in four steps bright medium dim and off Input mode e The AVR 4806CI has an AUTO signal detection mode that automatically identifies the type of incoming audio signals but is also equipped with a manual mode that can be switched according to the type of input audio signals L Selecting the AUTO PCM and DTS modes Press the INPUT MODE button The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT MODE button on the main unit is pre
92. signal Input signal channel indicator The channels included in the input source will light This lights when the digital signal is inputted Information display This displays the surround mode function name or setting value etc O Output signal channel indicator The audio channels that can be output light O Speaker indicator This lights corresponding to the settings of the surround speakers of the various surround modes Decoder indicator This lights when each decoder is operating Master volume indicator This displays the volume level The Setup item number is displayed in System Setup IEEE1394 indicator This lights during playback in a IEEE1394 connection MULTI zone indicator ZONE3 mode is selected in ZONE3 REC SELECT 11 DENON LINK IEEE 1394 D Recording output source indicator REC OUT mode is selected in ZONES REC SELECT D DENON LINK indicator This lights during playback in a DENON LINK connection D AL24 indicator The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO MULTI CH PURE DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT MULTI CH IN mode is selected in the PCM input signal B Input mode indicator This lights corresponding to the setting of the INPUT mode D RDS indicator This lights when RDS broadcast has been received AUTO indicator This lights when the broadcast station is selected in the AUTO tuning mode TUNED indicator This lights when an FM AM broad
93. signals Aspect e FULL The video is output while maintaining the aspect ratio of the input video This mode is suited for playing back 16 9 video NORMAL A black band is added to the left and right of the input video and the video is output This mode is suited for playing back 4 3 video Resolution 480p 576p When the video signal being input is a video S Video or 480i 576i component video signal the resolution is converted to 480p 576p and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal 1080i When the video signal being input is a video S Video or 4801 5761 480p 576p component video signal the resolution is converted to 1080i and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal 720p When the video signal being input is a video S Video or 4801 5761 480p 576p component video signal the resolution is converted to 720p and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal 1080p The input video signal is converted to a resolution of 1080p for output Through The video signal being input is output as such from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal without being converted Color Space e Y Cb Cr The Y Cb Cr format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector RGB The RGB format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector RGB Mode Setup Normal Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range data range of 16 bl
94. some models P e When a remote control code is sent the icon for the mode of the device to which that code belongs flashes e The HOME button is used to return to the AMP AMP ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL mode when in any mode other than AMP 1 CD player CD CD recorder CDR system buttons lt lt kb Manual search forward and reverse L Stop Play ka Kl Auto search to beginning of track H Pause 0 9 10 Number Default setting CD The preset codes of a CDR can be recorded in the CD mode so that the CD recorder can be operated CS page 82 It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the CD or CDR x To operate a DENON CDR player preset 30626 or 31868 To return to operation of a DENON CD player preset 31867 RC 1036 Or D 81 Advanced Operation 2 Tape deck TAPE system buttons RC 1038 lt lt gt gt Manual search forward and reverse Stop Play lt lt Kl Auto search to beginning of track il Pause 0 9 10 Number x Default setting VCR CS page 84 The preset codes of a TAPE can be recorded in the VCR mode so that the tape deck can be operated CS page 82 It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the VCR or TAPE To operate a DENON TAPE
95. speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover P have been made using the measurement microphone speakers with a built in filter such as subwoofers might be set with a value that differs from the physical distance because of the internal electrical delay NOTE Do not turn off the power while the data is being stored If the power is turned off while the data is being stored the Room EQ parameters stored in the memory will be cleared and it will not be possible to select Audyssey Front or Flat equalizer settings Easy Setup and Operation About the error message e These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can not be completed because of the speaker arrangement measurement environment or other factors Please check the following matters reset the pertinent items and measure again Be sure to turn off the AVR 4806CI s power before checking the speaker connections Screen example Cause Measures 1 1 Auto Setup Caution Kc a E Front gt L R None Retry4 Cancel4 a aag o py E CD The speakers required for producing suitable reproduction have not been detected The front L and front R speakers were not properly detected e Only one channel of the surround A and surround B speakers was detected e Sound was output from the R channel when only
96. the ENTER button e The Network Option screen appears Network Setup IP Address 7T Network Option Standby Mode Power Saving H gt Proxy ON Network Option PC Language H Exit MAC Address C 0005cd 10d901 Press the CURSOR 1 or button to select ON or OFF 7 Network Option Standby Mode Power Saving OFF PC Language 4 eng gt Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Network Setup menu reappears O Setting the PC Language Select according to the language of the computer being used The languages are indicated with three letters conforming to ISO639 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select PC Language Press the CURSOR lt or button to select PC language 7 Network Option Standby Mode Power Saving 40N gt PC Language 4 eng gt Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Network Setup menu reappears U Checking the MAC Address e The AVR 4806CI s MAC address is displayed e The MAC address differs for each set 7 Network Option Standby Mode Power Saving 4ON gt PC Language 4 eng gt MAC Address C 0005cd 10d901 124 Advanced Setup Part 2 e This Speaker Setup section describes the procedures to make speaker settings manually without using the Auto Setup function as well as to make manual changes to settings that have already been made by the Auto Setup fu
97. this to achieve an atmosphere like that of a movie theater with a large screen In this mode all signal sources are played in the 7 1 channel mode including Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital 5 1 channel sources Effects simulating the multi surround speakers of movie theaters are added to the surround channels SUPER Select this when watching baseball or soccer programs to achieve a sound as if you were actually at STADIUM the stadium This mode provides the longest reverberation signals ROCK ARENA Use this mode to achieve the feeling of a live concert in an arena with reflected sounds coming from all directions This mode creates the sound field of a live house with a low ceiling and hard walls This mode gives JAZZ CLUB jazz a very vivid realism 5 CONCERT Select this for the sound of a concert hall rich in reverberations 6 NOTES MOVIE Select this when watching monaural movies for a greater sense of expansion 7 VIDEO GAME Use this to enjoy video game sources Select this to emphasize the sense of expansion for music sources recorded in stereo Signals consisting of the difference component of the input signals the component that provides the sense of expansion processed for delay are output from the surround channel 8 MATRIX The front left channel signals are output to the surround and surround back signal left channels the front right channel signals are output to the surround and surround back signal right
98. to ON is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on OFF If OFF is selected when an input source set to ON is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off It iD RECT STERE ORIOL THX DOLBY DTS CINEMA ON MUSIC ON GAME ON WIDE SCREEN ON 7CH STEREO ON DSP SIMULATION ON MULTI CH MODE ON Press the ENTER button Return to the Trigger Out screen Xx Use the same procedure to make the settings for Trigger Out 2 3 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button The Option Setup menu reappears 6 4 Trigger Out Trigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 Trigger Out 3 Default GExit Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Advanced Setup Part 1 ZONE2 and ZONES tone control and channel level setting e Adjust the sound output from ZONE2 and ZONES 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev screen 6 Option Setup 6 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev Channel Setup Power Amp Assign Volume Control Trigger Out Zone2 3 Tone Ch Le Digital Out Assign EFZone2 Tone Ch Lev Zone3 Tone Ch Lev
99. to connect e Video signals are not transferred with the AVR A4806CI s IEEE1394 interface so when connecting a video device connect the video signals as well 37 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the antenna terminals e An F type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly o FM ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA Supplied DIRECTION OF BROADCASTING STATION 75 Q ohms COAXIAL CABLE I FM COAX 750 om FM INDOOR ANTENNA Supplied GROUND AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA L AM loop antenna assembly Connect to the AM antenna terminals OT Bend in the reverse direction and take out the connection line a With the antenna on top any stable surface b With the antenna attached to a wall Installation hole Mount on wall etc Connection of AM antennas 1 Push the lever 2 Insert the 3 Return the conductor lever Note to CATV system installer e This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer s attention to Article 820 40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building as close to the point of cable entry as practical 38 y in NOTE Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously Even if an external AM antenna is used
100. tracks However because the data rate for these audio tracks is extremely high there are limits to recording them on two channels only and since the quality of the pictures must be restricted it is common to only include still pictures In addition 96 kHz 24 bit 5 1 channel surround is possible with DVD audio sources but DVD audio players are required to play them with this high quality DTS 96 24 is a multi channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc in order to deal with this situation Conventional surround formats used sampling frequencies of 48 or 44 1 kHz so 20 kHz was about the maximum playback signal frequency With DTS 96 24 the sampling frequency is increased to 96 or 88 2 kHz to achieve a wide frequency range of over 40 kHz In addition DTS 96 24 has a resolution of 24 bits resulting in the same frequency band and dynamic range as 96 kHz 24 bit PCM As with conventional DTS Surround DTS 96 24 is compatible with a maximum of 5 1 channels so sources recorded using DTS 96 24 can be played in high sampling frequency multiple channel audio with such normal media as DVD videos and CDs Thus with DTS 96 24 the same 96 kHz 24 bit multi channel surround sound as with DVD Audio can be achieved while viewing DVD Video images on a conventional DVD Video player X1 Furthermore with DTS 96 24 compatible CDs 88 2 kHz 24 bit multi channel surround can be achieved using normal CD LD players X 1
101. x O O O O x x x x x x Lx SAN XIT1d 1VLIBIO A9100 x x x x x x O O O oe x x x x x x Cx VININIO XITId 1V118IQ A9100 x 2d SS x X x e e e O x x x X X x WLI9IG 49100 x x x x x x O O O O x x x x x x Lx X3 1v11910 49100 GNNOY NS A9100 O x O O x O X x x x x Xx x x O O JISNW 9 03N SLO O x O O x x x x x x x x x O VIN3NIJ 9 03N SLC x x x x x X X x x x O O O x x x Le 9 03N S10 x x x x x x x x x x O O O x x Le SAN Xd SLA x x x x x x X x x x O O O O x x Cx VWANIO XITld SLA x x x x x x x x x x o x x x x x 12 96 SLA Xx Xx x x x x x x x x x e O O x x ONNOYEHNS SLO x E ps xX E x x x x x x oe x x x Le Lou LIN S3 SLO x x x x x x x x x x x x x oe x x Le L91LYOSC S3 SLO ONNOYENS SLA OH VONVLS O x a O x O x x x x x 94 x x O O XH 9 03 O x O O x O x x x x x x x x O O XHL Id 49100 x O O x O P3 x x x x x x x O O XHL 9 Wd O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Vx XHL 9 XIMd x O x x O x O O O O O O O x x VG XH O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Cx pow saweg XH x O x x O x O O O O O O O x x Cx 9po N ISNIN XH x O K x O x O o D o O O O O x x Cx ewaulg ZeRIN XH ps O x x O E O O O x x x x E x Le X3 GNNOYYNS XH X x K x K x x x x x O O x x x Le XHL L OXHLIN S3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x E Le XHL 1 91H0Sd S3 VINANIO XHL 3INOH uoz uo ninu mp id uo nnw Ss SUNT j P iu E D eu au v2 96 ung Bela un Bela WM WA asd asd JO oipny qAQ Lon Agog agoa 1VLIDIO A9100 X4 111910 A9100 Sid Sld Xal S3 S10 LISA 3 S10 au 901VNV 910N
102. 00 Chaparral 00053 00209 00216 ASA 00397 Cherokee 00123 00710 01480 Asat 00200 Chess 00114 00713 01085 01334 ASCI 00114 01334 CityCom 00115 00299 00607 00818 01075 01176 ASLF 00713 01232 AssCom 00853 Claasen Nachrichten 00520 AST 00321 00351 Clark 00613 Astacom 00668 00710 Clemens Kamphus 00396 00834 Aston 00142 01261 CNS 01367 Astra 00243 00607 00713 CNT 00520 Astrastar 00548 Cobra 00396 Astro 00133 00173 00358 00369 00501 00520 Colombia 00132 00668 00548 00607 00613 00658 01099 01100 Columbia 00132 01113 Columbus 00668 Athena 00668 Comag 00132 01232 01412 Atsat 01300 Condor 00369 00607 AtSky 01334 Connexions 00396 Audioline 01429 Conrad 00115 00132 00369 00501 00607 Audioton 00613 Conrad Electronic 00607 Aurora 00642 00879 Cosat 00592 Austar 00497 00642 00863 00879 01173 01259 Crossdigital 01109 Avalon 00396 Crown 00243 Axiel 00668 00710 Cryptovision 00455 Axis 00369 00834 00880 01111 Cyfra 01076 Beko 00455 Cyrus 00200 Bentley Walker 01017 D box 00723 00873 Best 00369 Daeryung 00396 Bestar 00243 Daewoo 00421 00713 01111 01296 Black Diamond 01284 Daumling 00794 Blaupunkt 00173 Delfa 00863 Blue Sky 00713 00885 Deltasat 01075 Boca 00132 00243 00713 00794 00829 01232 Dgtec 01242 01542 Boston 00132 00668 00710 Digatron 01294 Brainwave 00692 01294 Digena 01100 British Sky Broadcasting Digenius 00299 01161 00847 01175 01847 Digiality 00607 Broco 00713 Digipro 01105 BskyB 00847
103. 000 Subnet 255 255 255 04 PNS Mask 000 000 000 000 Second DNS Press the CURSOR 1 or gt button to select OFF The DHCP function is disabled 4 Press the CURSOR or V button to select the desired setting item then press the CURSOR gt button and CURSOR or V button to input the address IP Address Set the IP address within the ranges shown below The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set CLASS A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 CLASS B 1 72 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 CLASS C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Subnet Mask When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR 4806CI input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider Normally input 255 255 255 0 Gateway When connected to a gateway router input its IP address Primary DNS Secondary DNS If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider input it at Primary DNS If there are two or more DNS addresses input the first one at Second DNS Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The IP Address menu reappears a e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol These are systems by which the IP address and other network settings are automatically set for the AVR 4806CI computer broadband router and network devices DNS Domain Name System This is a system for converting the dom
104. 0036 10054 10009 10037 10037 10037 10000 10765 10767 10698 11037 10037 10087 10247 Mos 10001 10661 10009 10264 10009 10009 10783 10217 10893 10208 10287 10418 10362 10217 10180 10036 10235 10371 10614 11037 10817 10046 10610 10455 10070 10170 10037 10163 10217 10819 10780 10238 10370 10009 10817 10374 10412 10817 10156 10817 10282 10335 10560 10625 10714 10486 10668 10236 10463 10037 10163 10208 10217 10264 10282 10355 10361 10374 10486 10487 10556 10617 10661 10668 10698 10056 10186 10668 11037 10820 10821 10826 10247 10418 10051 10264 10374 10412 10817 10696 10753 10817 10264 10508 10765 10767 10820 10821 10848 11156 12 Chengdu Ching Tai Chun Yun Chunfeng Chung Hsin Chungfeng Chunsun Cimline Cinema Cineral Citizen City Clairtone Clarion Clarivox Clatronic Clayton CMS CMS Hightec 10009 10817 10003 10009 10000 10003 10700 10843 10009 10264 10036 10053 10412 10009 10817 10009 10218 10672 10092 10451 10030 10039 10186 10280 10009 10185 10180 10037 10070 10009 10037 10264 10320 10606 10648 11037 10216 10217 Commercial Solutions 10047 11447 Concerto Condor Conia Conic Conrac Conrowa Contec Continental Edison Cosmel Craig Cros
105. 0037 20043 20045 Carrefour 20045 20072 20121 20184 20209 20240 20278 Carver 20081 20294 20479 21278 21479 Casio 20000 ESC 20240 20278 Cathay 20278 Ferguson 20000 20041 20278 20320 CCE 20072 20278 Fidelity 20000 20072 20240 20278 20432 CGE 20000 Finlandia 20000 20037 20042 20043 20046 20048 Changhong 20048 20081 20081 20104 20226 Cimline 20072 Finlux 20000 20042 20081 20104 20315 Cineral 20278 Firstline 20037 20043 20045 20072 20209 20278 Citizen 20037 20278 21278 20348 Clatronic 20000 20072 Fisher 20046 20047 20104 Colt 20072 Flint 20209 20348 Condor 20278 Frontech 20072 6 PRESET CODE Fuji 20033 20035 Hypson 20000 20037 20072 20209 20278 Fujitsu 20000 20045 iBUYPOWER 21972 Fujitsu General 20037 mperial 20000 Funai 20000 21333 ngersoll 20209 20240 Galaxis 20278 nno Hit 20072 20432 Garrard 20000 inotech 20278 Gateway ZIL nterbuy 20072 GE 20035 20048 20060 20209 20226 20240 nterfunk 20081 20104 20320 20807 21035 21060 nternal 20278 GEC 20081 nternational 20037 20278 20642 General 20045 ntervision 20000 20209 20278 General Technic 20348 R 20041 20042 20045 20047 20072 20081 Genexxa 20104 20104 20209 20226 20240 20348 Gessen 20278 rradio 20072 20081 Go Video 20432 TT 20041 20046 20104 20240 GoldHand 20072 TV 20037 20278 GoldStar 20037 20038 20209 20225 20226 20348 JBL 20278 21237 Jensen 20041 Goodmans 20000 20037 20072 20081 20209 20278 JM
106. 0087 10633 10009 10418 10412 10259 10361 10037 10412 10179 10361 11037 10054 10037 10287 10102 10216 10024 10179 10780 10606 10037 10361 10163 10037 10855 10217 10037 10858 10019 10030 10056 10060 10606 10644 10856 11148 10264 10374 11437 10264 10136 10292 10655 10011 10016 10698 10706 10817 10362 10363 10556 10581 10579 10194 10208 10363 10473 11163 10154 10156 10104 10105 10346 10374 10247 10516 10516 10030 10036 10186 10187 10802 11254 10648 10714 10163 10217 10668 11037 10054 10412 11154 10486 10714 10217 10218 10032 10108 10698 11178 10668 10362 10060 10773 11037 10217 10480 10178 10109 10480 10544 10037 10386 11454 10715 10235 10556 10715 10264 10037 s WO ey 10700 RIES ER 10714 10512 10 1997 10880 10290 10548 10163 10054 10706 10264 10704 10371 17 Matsui atsushita Matsuviama axam Maxdorf axent MCE ediator Medion egapower Megas egatron MEI eile Melectronic emorex Memphis ercury Mermaid erritt Metronic etz MGA icromaxx icrostar icroTEK idland inato inerva inoka inutz istral Electronics itsubishi Mitsuri General PRESET CODE 10009 10163 10235 1044
107. 036 10046 10156 10165 10264 10320 10497 10499 10705 10817 10247 0512 10418 10371 10714 10721 10037 10072 10337 18 Noblex Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Norfolk Normerel Noshi Novak Novatronic NTC Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Omega Omni On Command Onimax Onking Onwa Optimus Optoma Optonica Orion Orline Ormond Orsowe Osaki Osio Oso Osume Otto Versand Pacific Pael Palladium Palsonic PRESET CODE 10154 10180 10070 10102 10109 10163 10346 10359 10548 10606 10748 10824 10217 10037 10109 10560 10714 10163 10037 10018 10012 10037 10037 10105 10092 10037 10455 10163 10208 10009 10037 10264 10264 10698 10891 10531 10714 10280 10102 10180 10602 10154 10166 10887 10093 10165 10011 10037 10264 10320 10463 10516 10655 10714 10037 10218 10668 11037 10516 10032 10037 10355 10374 10290 10218 10032 10036 10036 10037 10226 10235 10535 10544 10037 10556 10216 10037 10247 10630 10655 10001 10037 10412 10418 10216 10179 10208 10361 10374 10610 10631 10163 10195 10374 10531 10698 10706 10361 10473 10370 10706 10780 10218 10371 10250 10650 177 UNITS 10321 10355 10531 10544 10880 11463 10072 10217 10412 10556 10037 10072 10093 10109 10247 10320 10556 10714 11037 10363 10370 10714
108. 037 10208 10037 10011 10102 10170 11505 10374 10179 10037 10051 10032 10418 10706 10516 10146 10157 T0565 10361 10648 10179 10361 10102 10163 10435 10548 10706 10773 10177 10206 10264 10696 10805 10817 10072 10163 10339 10370 10282 10282 10361 10370 10036 10037 10111 10145 10250 10353 n TISSI 10180 10186 10320 10418 10060 10092 UOMO Tea NES 10455 10715 10335 10362 10698 10706 10235 10516 10698 10727 10825 10361 10548 10548 10053 10080 10150 10156 10650 10834 10715 10156 10178 21 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S SS Stag aksonic andard arlite enway ern rato udio Experience unic Line unkai unstar unwood uperla uperscan upersonic uperTech upervision upra upre Macy upreme usumu VA vasa wissline ylvania ymphonic ynco ysline ytong T A Tacico Tai Yi Taishan Tandberg Tandy Targa Tashiko Tatung TCL CM PRESET CODE 10019 10032 10009 10009 11037 10009 10218 10163 10009 10843 10037 10037 10610 10009 10037 10516 10864 10009 10805 10009 10264 10009 10046 10000 10218 10587 10871 10455 10247 10020 10171 10000 10451 10037 10216 10447 10009 10009 10009 10362 10039 10702 1003
109. 0521 40770 41173 41127 40768 40831 40783 40769 41159 40713 40872 40539 40839 40713 40699 40741 41158 40539 40741 41004 40539 40672 40730 40651 40831 40571 40713 40770 40774 40778 40790 40801 40869 40036 41416 41440 40741 40833 41115 41730 40646 40675 40713 40821 40695 40713 40884 41004 41730 40770 40774 40783 40820 41270 40713 41403 41521 3 Momitsu Tlogic Mustek x Onda NAD aiko Narita EC Nesa evir NextBase exxTech Nintaus orcent Nordmende oriko Nu Tec Okano Olidata Omni Onix Onkyo Oopla Optimus 41082 41265 40730 40651 40591 40770 41115 40591 40717 40770 40826 41402 41051 40872 40774 40752 40516 40752 40672 40690 40672 40503 41158 40525 OptoMedia Electronics Orion Oritron Ormond Otic P amp B Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panasonic Panda Philco Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Plu2 Pointer Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Powerpoint PRESET CODE 40896 40695 40651 40713 40826 40770 40695 40831 40770 40695 40672 40490 41762 40717 40690 40503 41260 40672 40490 40850 40784 41020 40539 40770 40872 41730 40692 41004 40692 40831 41003 40831 40698 40852 40627 40713 40852 40503 40790 40539 41267 40699
110. 072 30028 30681 31318 30287 31484 31317 30157 30018 31208 30157 30157 30093 30305 30157 30029 30194 31484 30157 30287 30029 30032 30157 30157 30000 30194 31208 30826 SHANI 30393 30305 30157 30043 30164 30174 30280 30164 30280 SOS 30155 30196 30655 30036 30196 30305 30469 30305 30426 30305 30426 31202 30038 30437 31294 31697 30180 30626 30155 30164 30175 30180 30305 30179 30342 31325 30393 30420 30425 30037 30157 30190 30626 Mission 30157 Sharp 30037 30180 30861 31658 31684 itsubishi 30156 Sherwood 30180 30196 30426 31067 MTC 30420 Shure 30043 usical Fidelity 30393 30437 Siemens 30157 30180 Myryad 30157 Silsonic 30036 30888 AD 30000 31208 Simaudio 30157 Nagaoka 30018 Sonic Frontiers 30157 aim 30157 Sony 30000 30100 30185 30490 30604 30605 Nakamichi 30147 31364 EC 30043 30234 Soundesign 30145 30425 Nikko 30164 30170 30174 STS 30018 SM 30157 Sugden 30157 Oak 30145 Symphonic 30305 Onkyo 30101 30868 31685 TAG McLaren 30157 Optimus 30000 30032 30037 30087 30145 30175 Tandy 30032 30179 30194 30196 30280 30305 30342 Tascam 30420 30420 30426 30437 30468 31063 31075 TDK 31208 Orion 30393 Teac 30174 30180 30393 30420 Panasonic 30029 30207 30303 30752 31682 Tec 30245 Parasound 30194 30420 Technics 30029 30207 30303 Penney 30043 Thomson 30053 Perform Hifi 30420
111. 092 10320 10374 10418 10480 10102 10216 10247 Unic Line United Universal Universum Univox Utax V2max V7 Videoseven V7Videoseven Vector Research Vestel ictor ideocon ideologic ideologique ideomac ideosat ideotechnic ideoton idikron idtech iewsonic iking nc ision istar EX lt WE WE Bee WE A lt zio Voxson Waltham Wards Warumaia Watson Watt Radio Waycon Wega Wegavox 10037 10037 10027 0009 10104 10177 10290 10418 10535 11037 10037 10163 10865 11755 10880 10030 10037 11163 10036 10508 10216 10218 10009 10247 10217 10356 10054 10019 10724 10046 11756 10032 10206 10864 10087 0037 10443 0000 10021 10054 10111 10178 11147 10374 0009 10668 10102 10156 10036 10037 10455 10606 10037 10421 11437 10087 10163 10053 10218 10264 10320 10036 10857 10037 10361 10885 10163 0109 10668 0016 10024 10055 10135 10179 11156 10661 0037 11037 10216 10037 0011 10105 10191 10346 10544 10714 10178 10548 11756 11037 11347 10218 11437 10544 10087 10032 10146 10200 10361 10473 10556 10163 10217 10250 10864 10217 10178 10163 10017 10027 0056 10154 10180 10715 10337 10556 10650
112. 0kHz B 2AM 600khHz B3M 1000khz BAM 1400khHz B5AM 1500kHz B6M 1710khHz B7FM 90 10MHz Y BSFM 90 10MHz Xx Itis also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting Block then pressing the CURSOR lt or gt button Press the ENTER button e Return to the Tuner Presets screen Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears 105 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GE 3 Audio Input Setup Digital In Assign EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename IEEE1394 Assign Tuner Presets IEEE1394 Auto Func it Advanced Setup Part 1 Video Setup e Make the video related settings Setting the HDMI DVI In Assignment e This setting assigns the HDMI input terminals and DVI input terminal for different input sources e Set the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Video Setup at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Video Setup menu screen System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ MAGO SUR Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 4 5 Advanc
113. 1 40573 40672 40730 41107 40646 40768 41348 41348 40717 40571 40783 40695 41078 40702 40699 41016 41250 40695 40672 41423 40503 41049 40783 40790 40699 40713 40490 40770 40717 40717 40711 40651 40690 41004 40769 40713 40651 40850 40783 40702 40713 40664 40872 40783 40839 40627 40539 41051 40713 40770 40534 40790 40719 40896 40713 40730 40783 40790 41730 40670 40695 40705 40713 41004 41730 40826 40831 40695 40713 41247 40850 41634 40558 40623 40867 41164 40831 41020 41149 40720 40721 41423 Landel Lasonic Lawson LENCO Lenoxx Lexia LG Lifetec Limit LiteOn Loewe Logix Lumatron Lunatron Luxman Luxor Magnasonic agnavox Magnex alata Manhattan arantz Mark arquant Matsui axim MBO DS Mecotek edion MEI emorex Metronic etz Micromedia icromega Microsoft icrostar Minato inax Minerva inoka Minowa intek Mirror itsubishi Mizuda 40826 40798 40768 40651 41165 40690 40699 40591 40651 40768 41058 40511 40705 40705 40741 40573 40713 40651 40503 41165 40782 40705 40539 40713 40770 40651 41730 40713 40690 40778 40770 40630 40831 40790 40695 40690 40525 40503 40539 40522 40831 40752 40713 40705 40770 41165 40717 40752 4
114. 10 1027 10362 11437 10206 10206 10264 10435 10264 10036 110193 10650 MOS 10179 10412 10236 10443 10236 10817 10451 10088 10156 10217 10412 10721 10548 10217 10394 11037 10154 10163 10487 10516 10516 10346 10412 10039 10200 10688 10104 10157 10264 10486 10799 10606 10218 10544 MAS 10156 10216 10634 10544 10544 10362 10817 10053 10256 10689 Show Siarem Siemens Siera Siesta Signature Silva Silva Schneider Silver SilverCrest Simpson Singer Sinotec Sinudyne Skantic SKY Skygiant Skysonic Skyworth Sliding SLX Smaragd Soemtron Solavox Sole Sonawa Songba Soniko Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound amp Vision Soundesign Soundwave Sowa Spectra Spectricon Squareview Ssangyong 10009 10087 10032 10200 10012 10370 10016 10037 10037 10036 11037 10186 0009 10433 10371 11537 10544 10356 10037 10180 10696 10009 10748 10865 10512 10487 10865 10032 10813 10218 10009 10037 10208 10009 10163 10009 10000 10093 10157 11100 10102 10178 10032 10036 10226 10009 10003 10171 10009 10264 0087 10072 10102 10037 10361 10216 10037 10187 10087 10418 10102 10282 10753 10037 10753 10668 10037 10217 10
115. 2 10217 10003 10054 10217 11254 10412 10714 10180 10037 10037 10282 10206 10037 10321 10037 10037 10037 10039 10287 10698 10872 10030 10180 10036 10092 10374 10367 10072 11756 10698 10808 0036 0359 10009 10055 10516 10217 10218 10180 10264 10259 10363 10264 10355 10455 10264 10371 10208 10264 10216 10218 10056 10178 10335 10748 10768 10054 10096 10060 10092 10178 10179 10817 10411 10093 10163 10092 10146 10363 10650 10011 10036 10060 10072 10556 10621 10706 10727 10320 10374 10411 10487 10531 10579 10455 10698 10865 10870 10171 10381 10093 10178 10217 10218 10163 0721 10037 0154 0629 10216 10051 10156 11156 10826 11537 Teac Tec Tech Line Techica echnema Technics TechniSat Technisson Technol Ace Technosonic echview Techwood Tecnimagen Teco Tedelex Tek Teknika Telecor Telefunken efusion D egazi o o emeister esonic D estar o etech D eton D Televideon eleview Tempest Tennessee Tensai Tenson era Tesla Tevion 10009 10247 10512 10712 11724 10009 10337 10037 10218 10320 10051 10037 10714 UOUS 10556 10847 10003 10556 10009 10218 10009 1055
116. 2 10171 10037 10003 10001 10217 10556 10037 10037 10102 11756 10206 10037 10037 10217 10259 10394 10531 10544 10019 10070 10087 10102 10171 10774 10037 10773 28102997 10435 10185 10037 11661 10037 10320 10264 10037 IES 10185 10361 10714 10813 10840 10037 10812 10217 10009 10009 10264 10216 10163 10247 10178 10180 025910292 10516 10610 10264 10282 10104 10163 10038 10039 1017 101 777 10236 10247 10370 10371 10030 10217 10264 10217 10516 10463 11034 10361 10362 10630 10361 10548 10070 10087 LON TOS 10280 10282 10468 10486 10421 Feilang Feilu Feiyan Feiyue Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Filsai Finlandia Finlux Firstar Firstline Fisher Flint Forgestone Formenti Formenti Phoenix Fortress Fraba Friac Frontech Fujitsu Fujitsu General Funai Furi Futronic Future Futuretech Galaxi Galaxis Ganxin Gateway GBC 10009 10009 10264 10009 10009 10037 10287 10037 10361 10544 10217 10193 10037 10216 10093 10037 0009 10610 10853 10037 10180 10037 10037 10817 11755 10009 0045 10359 0037 10105 10480 10629 10009 0009 10217 10374 10668 0036 10154 10544 10037 0009 0009 10206 0009 0171
117. 25 00899 Samsung 00000 00040 00144 01060 Zentek 00400 Scientific Atlanta 00008 00017 00237 00277 00477 00877 01510 01877 SATELLITE Sejin 01602 sat 01300 Signal 00015 00040 Sky 01334 Signature 00011 ABsat 00123 00668 00713 00832 SL Marx 00040 ADB 00642 00887 01259 01367 01473 01491 Sony 01006 01460 01492 01493 01494 01495 Sprucer 00021 Aegir 00520 Starcom 00003 00014 00015 AGS 00668 00710 Stargate 00015 00040 00797 Aiwa 01514 Starquest 00015 Akai 00200 00515 Sumitomo 01500 01504 Akena 00668 Supercable 00276 Alba 00421 00455 00515 00613 00713 Supermax 00883 Aldes 00520 Tadiran 00040 Allsat 00200 01017 01043 Tandy 00258 Allsonic 00369 Tele Danmark 01016 Alltech 00713 Tele 1 00443 Allvision 01232 01334 01412 Telepiu 00443 Alpha 00668 Teleview 00040 AlphaStar 00772 Telewest 01068 01368 Amitronica 00713 Thomson 01110 01256 Ampere 00132 00396 00829 Time Warner cable 01877 Amstrad 00132 00243 00345 00396 00501 00675 Timeless 00040 00689 00713 00742 00795 00847 00863 Tocom 00012 00013 00882 00885 01113 01175 Torx 00003 Anglo 00713 Toshiba 00000 01509 Ankaro 00369 00692 00713 01279 Trans PX 00153 00276 00315 AntSat 01017 01083 TransACT 01106 Anttron 00421 00613 Tri Vision 01257 Apollo 00421 00455 Tristar 00883 Arcon 00692 00834 01043 01075 01205 01279 25 PRESET CODE Arcus 01143 CCE 00345 Arion 01205 Century 00856 Armstrong 00243 Channel Master 00212 Arnion 013
118. 3 10579 10051 10587 10264 10773 11755 10009 10012 10037 10808 10700 10610 10003 10185 10264 10009 10195 10374 10661 10009 10178 10337 10001 10706 10037 10163 10625 10037 10447 10019 10374 10037 10808 10706 10017 10037 10070 10359 10021 10193 10019 10093 10180 10535 11250 10163 10011 MAO WA MOSS 10455 10629 10250 10037 2310512 10880 10145 11037 10412 10037 OA 10411 10714 10016 10179 10009 10070 10535 10030 10630 10032 10108 10412 10030 10108 10208 10556 10035 10036 OOTP ROMS 10355 10363 10487 10516 10714 11037 10650 10556 10668 11037 11137 10178 10817 10848 10056 10060 10250 10463 10060 10264 10087 10275 10587 10668 10037 10150 10668 10808 10039 10047 10487 10516 10036 10037 10150 10154 10236 10250 10817 10836 10104 10105 10217 10247 10480 10492 10037 10208 10371 10544 10698 11437 1037 10746 11037 10535 10163 0346 0512 10150 10473 10367 10178 10051 10056 10178 10381 10868 10072 IZ 10433 10556 10714 10191 10361 10634 10154 10556 10388 10218 10135 10087 10179 10512 11037 Mivar onaco Monivision organ s Motorola ME MTEC Tlogic Mudan ultibroadcast Multitec ultitech Mu
119. 349S 30IM x x x x ap 0 O O NO O 8P 0 O x O NI H2 IANN x ps x x x x x xX x O NI 1X3 x x x x ap 0 O x x apo O 440 O x x x O O3831S x x x x x O NO O ap 0 O x 193810 HO LI x x x x x O x ap 0 O x O 1938109 MAN asa x x x x x x x ap 0 O x X x O 193814 asa x x x x x x x gP 0 O 440 O x x x O 193810 193810 38Nd 13437 3zis 4300930 OA JOHINOO GAON Ls Ta Le H34OOM 4 1 OVE YA YIINZO YA 1N0Y3 193433 NOOY JAQON VIN3NIO ANOL 1nO HO 8S Wasv 337 dlNOO 0 ans GNNOYYNS GNNOY NS SaaS SURE saseyjuaJed u UMOYS eje SAN EA 1jnejep 1e1euueJeg indino auueyo sepou 1uejeyip eu ul Ayiqeysnipe pue sjeuDis siajaweied pue s pow punong 157 Additional Information ejqeisnipe 10N x Dunes uoneunBijuoo 1exeeds Aq Up Jo uo pauiNL aiqeisnipe JON euBis ON x aiqeisnipy o aiqeisnipy jeu amp is O x x x x x x oasu 0 O 440 O XIg VIA E E x x x x x 440 O JWY9 O3GIA x x x x x x x 440 O 3IAOIN ONOW x x x x x x X 440 O 18H329NOO OISSV 19 x x x x x x x 440 O ano ZZvr x x x x x x x 440 O VN3HV J904 x x x x x x x 440 O WNIGVLS Y3dNS x E x E x E x 440 O OdH3lS HOL x x x x x x x x aNNOYYNS SLA x z z x x E x 440 O VLIDIO Ag 1OG x 0 0 x x x x x 440 O 9 03N SLO x x O O 440 0 x x 440 O JI 31901 Odd A8 1OG x x e O
120. 444 01640 01505 01505 00775 01170 01505 01442 01443 01444 01427 01568 01561 01311 01623 01142 01442 01307 01848 01640 01300 01545 01307 01412 EN X2 Ces codes de pr s X3 X4 Lt SAT CBL These preset codes can be recorde DVD These preset codes Ces codes de pr s TV VCR ection peuven ection peuven can be recorde ection peuven ection peuven These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT CBL mode Ces codes de pr s tre enregistr s en mode din the DVD mode tre enregistr s en mode din the TV mode tre enregistr s en mode This preset code can be recorded in the VCR mode Ces codes de pr s tre enregistr s en mode Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory Les codes pr r gl s different en fonctiom des livraison de l usine DVD preset codes Codes pr r gl s DVD 41470 default d faut 40490 DVD 555 DVD 2910 DVD 800 E DVD 755 DVD 3800 DVD 1600 DVD 900 DVD 3910 DVD 2000 DVD 910 DVD 5900 DVD 2500 8 DVD 955 DVD 5910 DVD 3000 DVD 1000 DVD 9000 DVD 3300 DVD 1200 DVM 715 DVD 1500 DVM 1800 3 DVD 1710 DVM 1805 gt DVD 1910 DVM 1815 Z DVD 2200 DVM 2815 Q pvp 2800 DVM 4800 A DVD 28001I DVD 2900 36 PRESET CODE wa DENON TOKYO JAPAN www denon com Denon Brand Company D amp M Holdings Inc
121. 5 Citizen 21278 Sharp X4 20807 Colt 20072 Curtis Mathes 21035 CABLE PVR Combination x1 Daewoo 21278 Americast 00899 Emerson 20002 20294 20479 21278 21479 Digeo 01187 Funai 20000 21333 Freebox 01482 GE 20240 20807 21035 21060 General Instrument 00476 00810 GoldStar 20299 Jerrold 00476 00810 Harley Davidson 20000 Motorola 00476 00810 01106 01187 01376 Hitachi 20000 Nokia 01569 Lloyd s 20000 Pace 00237 01877 Magnasonic 21278 Pioneer 00877 01877 agnavox 20000 21781 RCA 01256 Magnin 20240 Scientific Atlanta 00877 01877 emorex 20162 21237 Sony 01006 MGA 20240 Supercable 00276 itsubishi 20043 20807 Thomson 01256 35 PRESET CODE Zenith 00899 DBS PVR Combination x1 sat 01300 Atsat 01300 British Sky Broadcasting 01175 Canal Satellite 01339 Comag 01412 Digiturk 01076 DirecTV 00099 01392 Dish Network System 00775 Dishpro 00775 Dream Multimedia 01237 Echostar 00610 Euro 01278 Expressvu 00775 Force 01194 Foxtel 01356 GbSAT 01214 Grundig 01150 Hughes Network Systems 01142 Humax 01176 Hyundai 01159 JVC 01170 Kathrein 01221 Maximum 01334 Motorola 00869 Nokia 01310 Opentel 01412 Pace 01423 Panasonic 01320 Philips 00099 Proscan 00392 RCA 01392 Rebox 01214 Sagem 01253 Samsung 01442 SKY 01175 Skyplus 01412 Sony 00639 Star Choice 00869 Strong 01158 Thomson 01900 Topfield 01206 TRS 02657 Zehnder 01075 00392 00639 01076 01142 01377 01442 01443 01
122. 5 To continue searching repeat step 3 f noother TP station is found when all the frequencies are searched NO PROGRAMME is displayed RDS New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search NON RDS RDS station PIY Program category TP Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset lUpjDown OHB5 FM105 50MH J 70 Ez TUNING BAND CURSOR lt I gt p RDS SEARCH 9 CHANNEL II RT Radio Text e HT appears on the display when radio text data is received Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION S Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode 2 Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN mode Remote control unit 3 Press the RDS SEARCH button until RT ON appears on the display The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display While receiving an RDS broadcast station the text data broadcast from the station is displayed To turn the display off press the CURSOR lt or gt button f no text data is being broadcast NO TEXT DATA is displayed RDS New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search RS RDS station PY Program category TP Traffic info EE Radio Text dot
123. 520 00607 LLUSION sat 01557 Legend 00269 iLo 01535 Lemon 00692 01461 mex 00084 00136 00520 Lenco 00115 00369 00421 00607 00628 00692 mperial 01429 00713 ndovision 00887 Lennox 00592 ngelen 00114 00396 00882 Lenson 00501 nnova 00099 Leyco 00515 nternational 00132 00243 LG 01075 01226 01414 nterstar 01017 01105 01214 Lifesat 00132 00157 00299 00369 00605 00713 ntertronic 00243 01043 01122 ntervision 00592 00607 00628 Lifetec 00587 nVideo 00871 Lodos 01284 Q 00210 Loewe 00243 Q Prism 00210 Logix 01017 01075 R 00173 00282 00331 00358 00455 Lorenzen 00132 00299 00607 00692 00742 00794 rdeto Technology 00879 00867 01161 01294 SkyB 00887 Lupus 00369 taltel 00871 Luxor 00345 00501 00573 Jadeworld 00642 M vision 01557 Jaeger 01334 agnavox 00722 00724 Janeil 00152 Manata 00132 00136 00417 00668 00710 00713 JOK 00690 00710 anhattan 00455 00520 00592 00834 01017 01083 Jolly 00592 Marantz 00200 JVC 00492 00515 00571 00775 01170 01507 arave 00417 01531 01775 Mascom 00520 K SAT 00713 aspro 00173 00571 00692 00713 00750 01530 Kamm 00713 00880 Mastec 01334 Kaon 01300 atsui 00173 00571 00710 01284 KaTelco 01111 Matsushita 00500 28 PRESET CODE Max aximum MB DS Mediacom ediamarkt MediaSat edion Medison ega Melectronic emorex Metronic etz Micro icro electronic Micromaxx icrostar Microtec inerva Mitsubishi organ s Motorola ultichoice
124. 56 10668 10767 10046 10238 10435 10053 10247 10264 10218 10632 10725 10817 10320 10039 10264 10208 10264 30 69 10808 10411 10163 10072 10235 10247 10610 11437 10455 10706 10785 10259 10292 10499 10556 10108 10150 10817 10282 10371 10638 10641 10726 10754 10421 10180 10185 10412 10226 10264 10412 10418 10216 10217 10374 10721 10264 10579 10362 10411 10362 10374 10610 10180 10418 10587 10708 10707 10779 10795 10217 10280 10374 10661 11037 LG Liesenk amp Tter Liesenkotter Lifetec Lihua Lloyd s Lloytron Loewe Logik Logix Longjiang Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman Luxor LXI ER M Electronic adison Magnadyne agnafon Magnavox agnum Majestic anesth Manhattan arantz Marelli ark Master s asuda Materin 10001 10038 10442 10714 11637 10037 10012 10037 11037 10817 10001 10032 10037 10516 10001 10264 10668 10264 10206 10721 7 10009 10056 10163 10356 10631 10047 10054 10009 10217 10037 10087 10102 10020 10096 10729 10037 10016 10035 10320 10037 10030 10854 10087 10037 10499 10009 10208 10003 10039 10556 10715 10033 10037 10218 11137 10009 1
125. 6 10009 10016 10092 10037 10037 10346 10625 10753 10037 10037 10320 10037 10009 10009 10036 10363 10216 10037 10009 10037 10009 10218 10556 10009 10030 10037 10556 1 1197 10037 10264 10544 10714 11755 10037 10361 10668 10250 10163 10264 10051 10036 10264 10037 10606 10264 10019 10150 10394 10056 10421 10698 10819 10556 10037 10037 10163 10320 10037 10037 10247 10715 10320 10092 10648 10170 10282 10556 10721 10163 11437 10556 10556 10374 10056 10051 10073 10486 10702 10820 10412 10337 10186 10264 10104 10320 11037 10466 10668 10280 10208 10706 10706 10039 10178 OA 10412 10668 10755 10217 10650 10655 10412 11163 10092 0653 10217 10726 10795 10054 10180 281071097 10498 10706 10821 10556 10668 10206 10455 810 105 CEA 10714 10178 10418 10698 11037 10247 10093 10264 10891 10056 10186 10287 10560 10712 10579 11037 10217 10556 10163 10374 10767 21020077 10455 10706 11437 10259 10178 10418 SST 10060 10335 10587 10714 10259 5 TOU NDS 11037 22 Texet ThemeScene Thomson Thorn Thorn Ferguson Tiane
126. 6 O Headphones jack PHONES 45 O V AUX INPUT terminals co 30 Q SETUP MIC jack 20 O USER MODE 1 button 60 O USER MODE 2 button 60 O USER MODE 3 button 60 D Master volume control knob 44 D Master volume indicator 44 D Display istae deett 11 B Remote control sensor 9 D FUNCTION knob 44 B SOURCE button 44 TUNING PRESET button 67 D ZONE2 SELECT button 92 D ZONE3 REC SELECT button 92 95 D MultEO XT indicator 48 DIRECT P STEREO STANDARD w l CH STEREO SIMULATION ri Nd SCIT UR SYSTEM SEN BACK 10 DEFEAT DIMMER STATUS ROOM L SETUP MIC 7 20 OOO gt INPUT MODE button 47 ANALOG button 47 D EXT IN buttons 45 SYSTEM SETUP button 21 CURSOR button icono 21 SURROUND BACK button 52 ROOM EQ button 48 STATUS button 46 9 DIMMER button 46 TONE DEFEAT button 64 SURROUND PARAMETER button 50 CH SELECT ENTER button 21 64 DSP SIMULATION button 62 7CH STEREO button 62 HOME THX CINEMA button 44 9 STANDARD button 54 9 DIRECT STEREO button 50 PURE DIRECT button 50 Getting Started Display AUTO RDS TUNED STEREO Input signal indicator The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input
127. 7 8 to select system call setting The IR segment blinks twice 86 Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 to 3 you want to register the system call Press the button you want to register e The IR segment blinks once after each button press x The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button Repeat steps 4 to register the desired buttons Xx Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1 3 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds to register the system call The IR segment blinks twice NOTE The remote control signals of the buttons pressed while registering the system call signals are emitted so be careful not to operate the components accidentally cover the remote sensors for example L Using the system call function Press the AMP button to select the SYSTEM CALL mode Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 to 3 at which the system call signals have been stored The stored signals are transmitted successively Punch Through Buttons used in the CD DVD and VCR modes can be assigned to the buttons which are not normally used in the TV and SAT CBL modes For example when the DVD mode is set to the punch through mode in the TV mode the DVD mode s PLAY STOP Il MANUAL SEARCH aa gt gt AUTO SEARCH a gt gt and PAUSE ii button s signals are sent in the TV mode x 1 2 Press and hold the RC SETUP but
128. 7 10512 10102 0282 0487 10032 10072 10105 Omir 10216 10287 10359 10516 10817 10817 10247 10411 11037 10753 10264 10361 10374 10610 10102 10512 10163 10163 10370 10035 10073 10108 10193 10217 10290 10361 10535 10848 10455 10849 10371 10370 10412 10714 a MO 10200 10217 10377 10036 0087 0109 0194 0226 0291 0363 0556 10621 10865 10556 10418 10661 10247 10247 10218 10394 10037 0093 0146 0195 0235 0292 0370 rradio RT sukal TC Ts TT TT Nokia TV Janeil JBL JCB Jean Jensen Jiahua JiaLiCai Jinfeng Jinhai Jinque Jinta Jinxing JNL Jocel Jubilee Juhua Kaige Kaisui Kambrook Kamp Kangchong Kangli Kangy Kapsch Karcher Kathrein Kawa Kawasho Kaypan KB Aristocrat KEC 10218 10451 10037 10217 10216 10163 10361 10163 10363 10037 10046 10054 10000 10003 10179 10698 10051 10009 10051 10848 10009 10009 10009 10556 10443 10698 10712 10556 10264 0036 10418 10683 10009 0009 10455 10217 10216 10848 10001 10009 10104 10037 10610 10556 10371 10216 10052 10163 10180 10247 10628 10218 10320 10264 10179 10473 10179 10473 10264 10009 10236 10706 10264 10208 10264 10264 10037 10698 10499
129. 78 Curtis Mathes 20035 20041 20060 20162 21035 Anam 20037 20162 20226 20240 20278 Cybernex 20240 Anam National 20162 20226 21562 CyberPower 21972 Anitech 20072 Cyrus 20081 Ansonic 20000 Daewoo 20045 20046 20104 20209 20278 20642 Apelsound 20209 21278 Aristona 20081 Dansai 20072 20278 ASA 20037 20081 Daytron 20278 Asha 20240 De Graaf 20042 20046 20048 20081 20104 Asuka 20037 20038 Decca 20000 20067 20081 20209 20348 Audiosonic 20072 20278 Deitron 20278 Audiovox 20037 20278 Dell 21972 Awa 20037 20043 20278 20642 Denko 20072 Baird 20000 20041 20104 Denon 20042 Basic Line 20046 20072 20104 20278 Diamant 20037 Beaumark 20240 Diamond 20209 20348 Beko 20104 Dick Smith Electronics Bell amp Howell 20104 20642 Bestar 20278 Digitor 20642 Black Diamond 20081 20642 DirecTV 20739 Black Panther 20278 Domland 20209 Blaupunkt 20081 20162 20226 DSE 20642 Blue Sky 20037 20072 20209 20278 20348 20642 Dual 20000 20041 20081 20278 20348 Bondstec 20072 Dumont 20000 20081 20104 Brandt 20041 20320 Durabrand 20038 20039 Brandt Electronic 20041 Dynatech 20000 Brandt Electronique 20041 Elbe 20038 20278 Brinkmann 20209 20348 Elcatech 20072 Broksonic 20002 20121 20184 20209 20348 20479 Electrohome 20037 21479 Electrophonic 20037 Bush 20000 20072 20081 20209 20278 20315 Elin 20240 20348 20642 Elsay 20072 Calix 20037 Elta 20072 20278 Canon 20035 Emerex 20032 Carena 20209 Emerson 20000 20002 20035 2
130. 806CIl but other remote control compatible DENON components as well In addition the memory contains the control signals for other remote control units so it can be used to operate non DENON remote control compatible products Inserting the batteries D Remove the remote control unit s rear cover Notes on batteries Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not E operate even when the remote control unit is operated nearby the set The included battery is only for verifying operation When inserting the batteries be sure to do so in the ES proper direction following the O and marks in the battery compartment e To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid 2 Set two LR6 AA batteries in the battery compartment in Do not use a new battery together with an old one the indicated direction e Do not use two different types of batteries e Do not short circuit disassemble heat or dispose of batteries in flames Remove the batteries from the remote control unit when you do not plan to use it for an extended period of time e f the battery fluid should leak carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries When replacing the batteries have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible Operating range of the remote control unit Getting Started Approx 23 feet 7 m Point the remote control unit at the remot
131. 820 40899 41044 Synn 40768 41075 Tandberg 40713 Sansui 40695 40768 40784 Tatung 40770 Sanyo 40670 40695 40873 Teac 40516 40571 40692 40695 40717 40741 Scan 40705 40850 40768 40790 40809 40833 41051 ScanMagic 40730 Technics 40490 40703 Schaub Lorenz 40770 41115 Technika 40768 40770 40831 41115 41165 Schneider 40539 40651 40705 40713 40774 40783 Technisson 41115 40790 40804 40831 Technosonic 40730 41051 41115 Schwaiger 40752 Techwood 40692 40713 Scientific Labs 40768 40798 Tedelex 40690 40768 41004 Scott 40651 40672 40797 Telefunken 40770 40790 40833 SEG 40713 40768 40798 40872 40884 Teletech 40713 40768 Semp 40503 Tensai 40651 40690 40770 Sensory Science 41158 Terapin 41031 Shanghai 40672 Tevion 40651 40768 40798 40833 Sharp 40630 40675 40713 40752 41256 Theta Digital 40571 Sharper Image 41117 Thomson 40522 Sherwood 40633 40717 40741 40770 41043 41077 Tokai 40698 40784 40790 4 PRESET CODE Tokaido 40698 CyberHome 41129 Toshiba 40503 40695 41045 41154 Denon 40490 Trans Continens 40826 Dick Smith Electronics TRANS continents 40826 40831 40872 41730 Transonic 40672 40730 41165 Digitrex 41056 Tredex 40800 40803 40804 DSE 41730 Trio 40770 40784 Funai 40675 41334 TYT 40705 Gateway 41073 41158 Umax 40690 Go Video 40741 41158 41304 41730 United 40672 40695 40768 40826 40852 41115 iLo 41348 41165 JVC 41164 Universal Multimedia 40768 LG 40741 Univers
132. 820 Digitor 10037 Digix 10880 DiK 10037 Dixi 10009 DL 10037 Domeos 10037 Domland 10394 Dongda 10009 Donghai 10009 Dream Vision 11704 DSE 10698 10556 10009 10056 10180 10499 10672 10218 10032 10714 10706 10374 10661 10363 10556 10072 10374 11178 10511 10587 10037 10037 10706 10668 10872 10499 10037 10780 10668 10019 10030 10092 10108 10217 10218 10556 10623 10700 10706 10035 10036 10715 10548 10698 10785 10217 10516 11264 11454 10576 10606 10087 10320 10216 10264 10825 10891 10698 11724 10087 10848 10872 11037 10032 10037 10154 10170 10264 10374 10628 10634 10865 10880 10037 10208 10795 10621 10371 10672 10891 13 Dual Dual Tec Dumont Dunai Durabrand DVX Dwin Dynatron E Elite Ecco EGE Edison Minerva Elbe Elbe Sharp Electroband Electrograph Electrohome Elekta Elektra Elin Elite Elman Elta Emco Emerson Emperor Envision Enzer Epson Erres ESA ESC Ether Etron Eurofeel EuroLine Euroman Europa Europhon Evolution Expert Exquisit Fagor PRESET CODE 10037 Wiley 10217 10017 10544 10003 11463 10891 10720 10012 10218 10706 10037 10487 10217 10411 10516 10000 11755 10381 10009 10017 10009 10218 10102 10009 10247 10019 10154 10180 10320 10623 10282 10030 10753 10833 1001
133. A alkaline battere 2 D AM loop antenna o eccccseccesesessesscsstecccetesecetsecetsteeeeees 1 FM indoor antenna 1 9 Setup microphone DM S305 wwwwwwmmmwwwewa 1 0 O Before using Pay attention to the following before using this unit Moving the set To prevent short circuits or damaged wires in the connection cables always unplug the power supply cord and disconnect the connection cables between all other audio components when moving the set Before turning the Power switch on Check once again that all connections are proper and that there are not problems with the connection cables Always set the power switch to the standby position before connecting and disconnecting connection cables Cautions on installation Store these instructions in a safe place After reading store these instructions along with the warranty in a safe place Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual set for explanation purposes Noise or disturbance of the picture may be generated if this unit or any other electronic equipment using microprocessors is used near a tuner or TV If this happens take the following steps e Install this unit as far as possible from the tuner or TV e Set the antenna wires from the tuner or TV away from this unit s power supply cord and input output connection cables e Noise or disturbance tends to occur particularly when using indoor ant
134. Audyssey ron items then press the ENTER button Flat e Display the verification screen A 8 Exit For instructions on checking the results of each item 127 page 24 The results of the Auto Setup procedure can Press the CURSOR A or V button to select EQ be reset even if the settings have been changed Parameter Check then press the ENTER after performing the Auto Setup procedure button Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Display the EQ Parameter Check screen Restore Yes then press the CURSOR lt 1 5 Parameter Check button Speaker Config Check 1 5 EQ Parameter Check 1 5 Parameter Check Delay Time Check E ox Ac Channel Level Check peaker Contig ec Crossover Freq Check goo Delay Time Check GEO Parameter Check Flat Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check Restore Yesi4 EQ Parameter Check Exit Exit mRestore Ki Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Equalizer curve then press the ENTER button e Display the EO Check screen EQ Check Audyssey GNext 4 Exit Front L Front R X The display is only an approximate picture of the response and that correction is happening at all frequencies 136 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears 1 5 Parameter Check Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check C
135. B 20209 20348 20348 20642 Joyce 20000 GPX 20037 JVC 20041 20045 20067 20081 21008 21283 Gradiente 20000 Kaisui 20072 Graetz 20041 20104 20240 ambrook 20037 Granada 20000 20037 20042 20046 20048 20081 Karcher 20081 20278 20104 20226 20240 EC 20037 20278 Grandin 20000 20037 20072 20209 20278 Kendo 20072 20209 20278 20315 20348 20642 Gronic 20104 enwood 20038 20041 20067 Grundig 20072 20081 20226 20320 20347 20348 KIC 20000 Haaz 20348 imari 20047 Hanseatic 20037 20038 20081 20209 Kioto 20348 Haojie 20240 LH 20072 Harley Davidson 20000 Kneissel 20037 20209 20278 20348 Harman Kardon 20038 20081 odak 20035 20037 Harwood 20072 Kolin 20041 20043 HCM 20072 olster 20209 Headquarter 20046 Korpel 20072 Hewlett Packard 21972 uba Electronic 20047 Hher 20278 20642 Kyoto 20072 HI Q 20047 Lenco 20278 Hinari 20041 20072 20240 20278 Leyco 20072 Hischito 20045 LG 20037 20038 20042 20045 20209 21237 Hitachi 20000 20037 20041 20042 20046 Lifetec 20209 20348 20081 20089 20240 20040 Linksys 21972 Hornyphon 20081 Lloyd s 20000 Howard Computers 21972 Loewe 20037 20081 20162 21562 HP EA Logik 20072 20209 20240 Hughes Network Systems Lux May 20072 20042 20739 Luxor 20043 20046 20047 20048 20104 20315 Humax 20739 LXI 20037 Hush 21972 M Electronic 20000 20038 7 PRESET CODE Magnasonic agnavox Magnin agnum Manesth arantz Mark arta Mastec aster s Matsui atsushita Media Cen
136. CI s EXT IN terminals for playback Also refer to your DVD player s operating instructions 34 Connecting Other Sources Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals e A simple 1 cable connection using a commercially available cable with a device having an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allows digital transfer of the digital images of DVD Video and other sources and the multi channel sound of DVD Audio and DVD Video e To provide audio output from AVR 4806CI s audio output connector select Amp at the System Setup To provide audio output from the TV select TV at the System Setup For details see Setting the HDMI DVI In Assign 1237 page 106 107 i m DVD player HDMI D E GUT TV Monitor HDMI CS N i Input signals L Copyright Protection System LINEAR PCM O To play back the digital video and audio of DVD Video and T DVD Audio through an HDMI DVI D connection both the DVD Video Dolby Digital 9 connected player and monitor are required to support a DIS O copyright protection system called HDCP High bandwidth LINEAR PCM Digital Content Protection System HDCP is copy DVD Audio PACKED PCM O protection technology that comprises data encryption and with CPPM without CPPM authentication of the partner equipment CD LINEAR DCH O The AVR 4806CI supports HDCP Please see the operating vm instruction of your video display for more information ulti area x hi Sup
137. CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing multi channel music 2 When not using surround back speakers Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer Surround speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Front speaker n WA 60 to 90 cm As seen from the side e Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers e Consult the operating instructions for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room e f the surround speakers are direct radiating monopolar then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90 centimeters 2 to 3 feet above ear level at the prime listening position Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 4806CI and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting ES page 138 e The surround speakers can be switched freely during playback with the surround parameter adjustment ES page 46 Additional Information Surround The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater
138. CLASSICL R amp B SOFT R amp B LANGUAGE REL MUSC REL TALK PERSNLTY PUBLIC COLLEGE WEATHER Nostalgia Jazz Classical R amp B Soft R amp B Language Religious music Religious talk Personality Public College Weather e TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements e This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area before you leaving home L Radio Text RT e RT allows the RDS station to send text messages that appear on the display NOTE e The operations described below pressing the RDS SEARCH button will not function in areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts Basic Operation CURSOR i RDS search e Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide RDS service Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION wA Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER TON mode Remote control unit Press the RDS SEARCH button until RDS SEARCH appears on the display RDS New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search EPH RDS station PIY Program category TP Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset Up Down CHB5 FM105 50MHz x The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button
139. CURSOR lt or button to select Custom 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo Setting 4Custom gt Front Sma Subwoofer 4 Yes Subwoofer Mode AILFE Press the CURSOR or V button to select the item then press CURSOR lt or gt button to set Xx Fora description of the settings for the different items see pages 125 and 131 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Advanced Playback menu reappears L Setting the front B speakers when the surround mode is set to the 2 channel Direct or Stereo When Front B is selected at Power Amp Assign and Custom is selected at this setting the Front B setting is displayed To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2 channel Direct or Stereo mode set Used 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo Setting Custom gt front B Used gt Front d Large Subwoofer deel gt Subwooter Mode 4 LFE Main gt Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Dolby Digital Setup Setting the Auto Surround Mode e Sets the down mixing method when not using a center speaker or surround speakers 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Dolby Digital Setup at the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button Display the Dolby Digital Setup screen 5 Advanced Playback 5 2 Dolby Digital 1 2ch Direct Stereo Downmix Opt
140. D ENTER PARAMETER Eus PHONES CURSOR DTS NEO 6 mode e Surround playback can be performed for the analog input and digital input 2 channel signals Press the STANDARD button to NEO 6 mode The DTS NEO 6 indicator lights select DTS 72 X The mode switches as shown DIS m below each time the STANDARD ay button is pressed lights DOLBY PLIIx DTS NEO 6 2 Play a program source Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e Display the Surround Parameter menu MODE 4 CINEMA CINEMA DTS NEO 6 EQ 4 D COMP TONE 4 SB CH_O 94 OFF Default Yesd UT Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the play mode DTS NEO 6 EDRN CNTR IMAGE 40 3 gt D COMP OFF TONE 4 SB CH O NJ gt OFF Default Yes UT 58 ny STANDARD ENTER P Wei CURSOR SURROUND 09 2 PARAMETER Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameters setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting E e When Default Yes is selected and the CURSOR lt button is pressed MODE and TONE are automatically reset to the default values and CINEMA EO is set to OFF
141. DENON AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 4806CI OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS L SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FCC INFORMATION For US customers RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 1 COMPLIANCE INFORMATION Product Name AV Surround Receiver Model Number AVR 4806CI This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Denon Electronics USA LLC 19C Chapin Road Suite 205 Pine Brook NJ 07058 9385 Tel 973 396 0810 Main 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY
142. ENTER button e Display the EXT IN Setup screen Audio Input Setup Digital In Assign d ae kup EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev 4 Surr A gt Function Rename Surr Sp IEEE1394 Assign IEEE1394 Auto Func SW Level 4 15dB Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR or gt button to select the parameter N Surr Sp Presets the surround speakers that are used in the EXT IN mode Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions e Surr A Select when using surround speakers A e Surr B Select when using surround speakers B Surr A B Select when using both surround speakers A and B SW Level Sets the playback level of the analog signal that was input to the EXT IN subwoofer terminal Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions 15dB default recommended 0 5 10 and 15 can be selected Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears 100 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Input Function Level Setting the Function Rename Correct the playback level of the different input sources Adjust the playback levels of the devices connected to the different input sources to the same level to eliminate the need
143. EO Cinema Equalizer The Cinema EQ function gently decreases the level of the extreme high frequencies compensating for overly bright sounding motion picture soundtracks Select this function if the sound from the front speakers is too bright This function only works in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital DTS Surround DTS NEO 6 and WIDE SCREEN modes D COMP Dynamic Range Compression Motion picture soundtracks have tremendous dynamic range the contrast between very soft and very loud sounds For listening late at night or whenever the maximum sound level is lower than usual the Dynamic Range Compression allows you to hear all of the sounds in the soundtrack but with reduced dynamic range This only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS Select one of the four parameters OFF LOW MID middle or HI high Set to OFF for normal listening This parameter is displayed only when playing compatible sources in DTS mode LEE Low Frequency Effect This sets the level of the LFE Low Frequency Effect sounds included in the source when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital DTS DVD Audio or Super Audio CD Program source and adjustment range 1 Dolby Digital 10 dB to 0 dB 2 DTS Surround 10 dB to 0 dB When DTS encoded movie software is played it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 0 dB for correct DTS playback When DTS encoded mus
144. N and 7CH STEREO DSP simulation modes the surround speakers can be set separately L About Speaker type setting when using both surround speakers A and B e f Small is set for either surround speakers A or B the output is the same as when Small is set for both A and B Settings the THX Audio Setup subwoofer L Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible Make these settings when Yes is selected for the subwoofer in the Speaker Configuration settings This option is not available when No is selected ES page 125 126 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select THX Audio Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the THX Audio Setup screen Speaker Setup 2 7 THX Audio Setup Speaker Config Subwoofer Setup Delay Time Channel Level Crossover Frequenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup xit GBoundary Gain Compensation Surround Back Speaker Position Exit 132 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Boundary Gain Compensation then press the ENTER button Press the CURSOR or gt button when using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer or subwoofer that frequency response extends to 20 Hz select Yes Otherwise select No 2 7 THX Audio Setup Do You Have GA THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Or Sub That Extends To 20Hz Yes gt KA lt When Y
145. NE 1 EXT IN NONE 2 ANALOG NONE 3 ANALOG Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input for the playback of signals when the audio signal of HDMI can not be reproduced then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input signal EXT IN or ANALOG 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign DVD HDMI 1 VDP HDMI2 TV HDMI3 HDMI DBS DVI D Audio AMP VCR NONE No Signal VCR 2 NONE 1 4EXT IN VCR 3 NONE 2 ANALOG V Aux NONE 3 ANALOG If there is no HDMI audio signal the signal automatically switches to the input from the set terminal X 1 3 correspond to each HDMI 1 3 input terminal Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears i e Input signals input from the analog and digital terminals are not output to the TV e With HDMI the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously When HDMI is assigned to an input source the digital audio input assignment switches to HDMI along with the video input When this setting is made for input sources to which a digital audio input DENON LINK IEEE1394 etc is previously assigned the digital audio assignment is set to HDMI In this case reassign the digital input using the procedure described at Digital In Assign page 99 and EEE1394 Assi
146. NNA DISCHARGE UNIT NEC SECTION 810 20 ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT 2 lt GROUNDING CONDUCTORS NEC SECTION 810 21 POWER SERVICE GROUNDING lt t ELECTRODE SYSTEM NEC ART 250 PART H NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the product Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up static charges Article 810 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit size of grounding conductors location of antenna discharge unit connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding electrode See Figure A Lightning For added protection for this product during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges
147. Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the zone whose sound you want to adjust ZONE2 ZONE3 then press the ENTER button Switch to the setting screen Example When Zone2 is selected 6 5 Zone2 Tone Ch Lev Bass 4 OdB gt Treble 4 0dB HPF 4 OFF Lch Lev 4 0dB Rch Lev 4 OdB Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR or gt button to adjust the parameter Bass Adjust the tone for the bass Treble Adjust the tone for the treble The bass or treble sound can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in steps of 2 0 dB HPF Set this to ON if your speakers do not have a very strong capacity for producing low bass Using the high pass filter makes it possible to reduce distortion of the bass sound Channel Level Set so that the playback level is the same for the left and right channels The volume can adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in steps of 1 0 dB Press the ENTER button Return to the Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev screen Xx Use the same procedure to make the settings for ZONES Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Option Setup menu reappears 6 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev Zone2 Tone Ch Lev Zone3 Tone Ch Lev e The Channel Level setting is only possible when ZONE2 or ZONE3 is set to Stereo in the Channel Setup menu 120 Advanced Setup
148. Printed in Japan 00D 511 4473 007
149. RM Software s ability to play unprotected content A list of revoked WM DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from PC Microsoft may in conjunction with such license also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners A e No signals are output to the digital output terminals when playing copyright protected music files e The AVR 4806C is compatible with MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 files with sampling frequencies of 32 44 1 or 48 kHz It is not compatible with MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 MPEG 2 5 Audio Layer 3 MP1 or MP2 files e The AVR 4806Cl is compatible with bit rates of 32 to 320 kbps for MP3 files and 48 to 192 kbps for WMA files e The AVR 4806CI is compatible with WMA files with sampling frequencies of 32 44 1 or 48 kHz e The AVR 4806CI is compatible with MP3 ID3 Tag Ver 2 e The AVR 4806CI is compatible with WMA meta tags e With the AVR 4806CI the folder names file names etc can be displayed on the main unit s display and the OSD Up to 95 characters can be displayed A mark is displayed in place of non compatible characters 156 Additional Information GO eipny Jedns pue oipny qAG SLA jeu6rq Aqiog BuiAejd uauun Zy sjeuBls sq pue e1B1g qiog Buikejd UIYM 1 d 10 VIN3NIO 01188 S IAOW 941 USYM eqeje e s 1e1euueied SIU yi ON NIW3NIO 01 198 S JAQON 94
150. RROUND mode Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button Display the Surround Parameter menu ET DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE DHI DECODER 4 PLII C gt TONE Default Yes 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR or gt button to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 59 Basic Operation O Parameters MODE e DH1 Reference room small room with weak reverberations e DH2 Live room room with a bit stronger reverberations than DH1 e DH3 Large room larger room than DH1 offers a sense of distance and sound diffusion effects e BYPASS Stereo sound DECODER Select this when playing analog PCM or other 2 channel sources The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode PLII C Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode PLII M Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode NEO 6 C DTS NEO 6 Cinema mode NEO 6 M DTS NEO 6 Music mode OFF The signals are played in the Dolby Headphone mode as Such 2 channels Recording When RECOUT mode is set to SOURCE with this amplifier signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder I page 95 Basic Operation USER MODE Memory and call out functions USER MODE function
151. Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the 106 197 the connected monitor device HDMI DVI In Assign settings to TV e The set s internal temperature has risen and e Put the AVR 4806CI in a well ventilated place the protection circuit has been activated e Turn off the power then wait for the set to fully cool off before turning the power back on Power has turned off and the e The core wires of the speaker cables are e Check the connections of all the speaker 15 power indicator is flashing red touching each other or the AVR 4806C s rear cables panel activating the protection circuit e AVR 4806CI is malfunctioning e Turn off the power and contact a DENON customer service center Scud ix eher WA The You are playing a monaural source TV AM e When playing monaural sources select a 61 62 E s Gg radio broadcast etc in the DOLBY DTS surround mode other than DOLBY DTS H SURROUND or HOME THX CINEMA mode SURROUND or HOME THX CINEMA CHECK ANTENNA is displayed e AVR 4806Cl s XM terminal and the XM e Check that the connection are correct 39 in the XM mode Passport System is not properly connected NO SIGNAL is displayed in the e The signal cannot be received e Reposition your XM Pasport System 71 XM mode OFF AIR is displayed in the XM e The selected channel is not currently Select the another channel 73 72 mode broadcasting Receiving only XM channels 0 The XM Tuner is not activated Contact XM
152. Setup Network Setup xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Auto Setup Room EO then press the ENTER button e Display the Auto Setup Room EQ menu screen 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 51 Auto Setup 2 Room EQ Setup 3 Direct Mode Setup 4 Mic Input Select L Exit Press the CURSOR or V button to select Auto Setup then press the ENTER button e Display the Auto Setup screen 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphone at ear height at main listening position Extra Setup Start Cancel The message Connect Microphone is displayed if no microphone is connected If so connect the auto setup microphone Easy Setup and Operation Extra Setup Preliminary measurements e The AVR 4806CI has seven available amplifier channels some of which can be assigned for powering speakers in ZONE2 and ZONE3 depending on the speaker system complement in the main room If this functionality is not needed skip this Extra Setup procedure and proceed to Preliminary Measurements 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Extra Setup then press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Extra Setup screen 1 1 Auto Setup E 1 1 Extra Set Please place microphont AT up at ear height at main listening positiol Channel Setup GExtra Setup Power Amp Assign Start Cancel Exit 2 Press the C
153. THIS PRODUCT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio TV technician for help This Class B apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la class
154. TMK TML TNCi Tobishi Tobo Tokai Tokaido Tokyo Tomashi Tongguang Tongtel Tophouse Toshiba Tosonic Totevision Towada Toyoda Trakton Trans Continens TRANS continents Transonic Triad Trical Trident Tristar Triumph Tsoschi Tuntex TVS TVTEXT 95 Uher Ultravox Unic PRESET CODE 10009 10887 10037 11447 10035 10109 10361 10073 10093 10056 11756 10017 10218 10009 10009 11037 11037 10035 10218 10264 10587 10180 10009 10102 10195 10556 10821 11356 10185 10039 10102 10009 10009 10037 10621 10009 10587 10037 10157 10516 10193 10177 10282 10009 10463 10556 10037 10486 10037 10163 10216 10109 10036 10163 10499 SUE 10817 4 ION 7 10264 10037 10282 10412 10780 0035 10109 10217 10618 10832 11508 10217 MOS 10217 281102077 10037 10698 10218 10218 10346 10030 10206 10087 10217 10218 10374 10287 10335 10560 10625 10037 10072 10073 10104 10193 10238 10335 10359 10512 10535 10238 10499 10178 10412 10748 10163 10337 10374 10668 10036 10060 10070 10093 10145 10154 10156 10191 10264 10381 10412 10508 10644 10650 10714 10718 10845 11156 11256 11265 11656 11704 10264 10264 10412 10264 10668 11037 10264 10418 10455 10512 10712 10780 10858 10556 10516 10556 10
155. TONE CR 99 SB CH OUT JE Na OFF Deia e Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 57 Basic Operation L Surround parameters Pro Logic IIx and Pro Logic II Mode Select one of the modes Cinema Music Pro Logic or Game The Cinema mode is for use with stereo television shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround The Music mode is recommended for stereo music and surround encoded stereo music sources The Pro Logic mode emulates Dolby Laboratories original Dolby Pro Logic surround decoding and may provide better results with older legacy surround encoded program material The Game mode is optimized for computer and or dedicated game box consoles that feature stereo analog or digital outputs It can only be used with 2 channel stereo sources PANORAMA This mode extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting wraparound effect with side wall imaging Select OFF or ON DIMENSION This control gradually adjust the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear The control can be set in 7 steps from O to 6 CENTER WIDTH This control adjust the center image so it may be heard only from the center speaker only from the left right speakers as a phantom image or from all three front speakers to varying degrees The control can be set in 8 steps from 0 to 7 Basic Operation SURROUND STANDAR
156. TUS button on the main unit e The XM Satellite Radio channels can be preset in the same way as AM FM band Please refer to Preset memory and Recalling preset stations IS page 66 67 Basic Operation Using the Network Audio Function e The AVR 4806CI can be connected to a network by cable to listen to Internet radio or music files stored on computers Internet radio function Internet radio refers to radio programs broadcast over the Internet There are many stations throughout the world broadcasting Internet radio programs These stations are of all sizes and types some run by individuals others by ground wave broadcast stations While ground wave radio stations can only be listened to within the range in which the waves reach Internet radio can be listened to anywhere in the world The AVR 4806CI is equipped with the following Internet radio functions e Stations can be selected by genre and region Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset e MP3 format Internet radio programs can be listened to Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing the exclusive DENON Internet radio URL using a computer s browser The AV amplifier automatically downloads the registration settings approximately once every other day This is managed separately for each unit so a MAC address or e mail address must be registered IS page 124 X Exclusive URL http www radiodenon co
157. URSOR lt or gt button to select whether to associate the OPTICAL2 OUT terminal to the ZONE3 REC SELECT or NEE ZONE2 SELECT mode 6 6 Digital Out Assign GOPTICAL2 OUT 4ZONE2 SELECT Press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes About 30 seconds are required for the settings to be stored in the memory Press the ENTER button to enter the setting f 6 7 User Memory The Option Setup menu reappears Gm Load Yes 4 Save Yes 4 Exit M P K Once the settings are stored in the memory Load is displayed and the settings can be loaded Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button Return to the Setup Memory Lock screen 121 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setup Lock P e When the setup lock function is activated the settings listed The system setup settings can be locked so that they below cannot be changed and SETUP LOCKED is cannot be changed easily displayed when related buttons are operated e System setup settings e Surround parameter settings 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select e Tone SEN settings Setup Lock at the Setup Memory Lock e Channel level settings including test tones screen then press the ENTER button Room EQ Switch to the Setup Lock screen To unlock press the SYSTEM SETUP button again and display the Setup Lock screen then select OFF and press the
158. URSOR A or V button to choose the setting you want to change then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen For instructions on making the Channel Setup settings ES page 115 X For instructions on making the Power Amp Assign settings I page 116 117 The speakers measured with this Auto Setup procedure are based on the setting of these Channel Setup and Power Amp Assign functions 3 Once the settings are completed press the ENTER button at the each setting screen e The Extra Setup menu reappears 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e Return to the Auto Setup screen e This procedure is used to automatically determine the background noise whether or not speakers are connected and the polarities of the connected speakers e To avoid affecting the measurements turn off the air conditioner or any other device that makes noise and take the measurements with the room as quiet as possible Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Start then press the CURSOR lt button e Start the preliminary measurements 1 1 Auto Setup D E 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphont at ear height at main listening positiol Speaker Detect Extra Setup GStartd Cancel EFCanceld The screen shown at the below appears once the preliminary measurements are completed 1 1 Auto Setup
159. WAY Nee 67 RDSiscaich eem 68 PTY search B9 IER GE 2 59 70 O ences c MT 70 XM Satellite Radio Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID 71 ChammeliSelection A ee eee ee 72 Ci o E TS RP 72 Using the Network Audio Function Hee e usic server function Systemrogureme ne 73 75 WAS Ni Mc Presetting registering Internet radio stations Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites YA Character search function searching by first letter vi Uedatingitnelisto mado siations et 78 Playing music files stored on the computer A O O SANA KAZA eee 78 79 Operating the AVR 4806CI using a browser sssssssss 79 Advanced Operation Remote control unit Operating DENON audio COMPONENTS ma 80 82 IO KEE 82 83 Operating a component stored in the preset memory Learning function System call 2 B ttel dulde O e O E E Setting the back light s lighting time 87 Setting the brightness BC dE Multi zone music entertainment system 90 ulti zone playback using the ZONE2 and ZONE3 PREOUT tenminals s a a n 90 ulti zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals 91 Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE2 room AONE S EHEC MAE m 92 Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE3 onm AINES SEU SCI GE 92 Remote control unit operations during multi source playback 93 O
160. You can adjust the muting level CS page 118 P e Cancelling MUTING mode Press the MUTE button again or press the VOLUME button on the remote control or adjust the volume up or down via the front panel VOLUME knob Listening over headphone Connect the headphone to the PHONES jack e The pre out output including the speaker output is automatically turned off when headphones are connected NOTE e To prevent hearing loss be careful not to raise the volume level excessively when using headphones 45 Basic Operation DIMMER INPUT MODE ANALOG STATUS rT INPUT MODE SPEAKER ON SCREEN VIDEO SELECT _ Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image VIDEO SELECT Checking the currently playing program source etc Press the VIDEO SELECT button until the desired image appears The video source selected with the video select function is stored in the memory for the different input sources P e Cancelling simulcast playback Select the SOURCE pressing the VIDEO SELECT button e t is not possible to select HDMI and DVI D input signals e When playing HDMI DVI D video input signals the analog video signal of another function cannot be selected for the HDMI video output Switching the surround speakers Press the SPEAKER button The surround speakers switch as shown below each time the SPEAKER button is
161. ack to 235 white Enhanced Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range data range of 0 black to 255 white When the HDMI connector is connected the black may seem to stand out depending on the TV or the monitor In this case set this to Enhanced When Y Cb Cr is selected under Color Space RGB Mode Setup will have no effect lt The aspect ratio setting is valid when the resolution is set to 1080i 720p or 1080p To output with other resolutions set the aspect ratio on the TV When Through is set the signal is output with the same resolution as input from the video S Video and component video terminals The OSD however is output with a resolution of 480i So use a monitor compatible with this resolution 108 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears I e Aspect Resolution Color Space and RGB Mode Setup are only displayed when Analog to HDMI Convert is set to ON e When connecting to an HDCP compatible monitor equipped with DVI D terminal using an HDMI DVI D converter cable the signals are output in RGB format regardless of the Color Space setting To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor set Analog to HDMI Convert at HDMI Out Setup to ON default 109 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Audio Delay When watching a DVD or oth
162. after performing the Auto Setup e When the speaker set as None with the Auto Setup is changed to on manually the equalizer of Audyssey Front and Flat cannot be used e The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ button e When headphones are connected the Room EO cannot be used 134 Advanced Setup Part 2 Setting the Direct Mode Setup Setting the MIC Input Select e Perform the ON OFF setting of Room EO when the surround mode is DIRECT or PURE DIRECT Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Direct Mode Setup at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Direct Mode Setup screen 1 Auto Setup Room EQ Auto Setup 1 3 Direct Mode Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check DIRECT PURE DIRECT Room EQ ON HRS Exit L Press the CURSOR lt or button to select ON or OFF Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears 135 e Sets whether the setup microphone is connected to the PIN JACK V AUX L channel connector or the MINI JACK SETUP MIC connector Press the CURSOR or V button to select Mic Input Select at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Mic Input Select screen 1 Auto Setup Room
163. ain names used when browsing Internet sites for example www denon jp into the IP addresses actually used for communications for example 202 221 192 106 123 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Proxy Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Proxy at the Network Setup screen then press the ENTER button The Proxy screen appears 7T Network Setup IP Address PFE Proxy eia Proxy Network Option Exit Press the CURSOR lt or button to select ON e The proxy server is enabled 7 Proxy Proxy 4ON gt Proxy 4Address gt Address 000 000 000 000 Port 0000 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired setting item then press the CURSOR gt button and CURSOR A or V button to input the character or number Proxy Input the proxy server domain name or address Port Input the proxy server port number Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Network Setup menu reappears Setting the Network Option L Setting the Power Saving e When not using the AVR 4806CI connected in a network set ON to reduce the power consumption when in the standby mode Set OFF when using the AVR 4806Cl connected in a network 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Network Option at the Network Setup screen then press
164. als undergo digital matrix processing for playback ES DSCRT When a signal identifying the source as a discrete 6 1 channel source is included in the DTS signals the surround back signals included in the source are played PLIIx Cinema Processing is performed with the Cinema mode of the PLIIx decoder and the surround back channel is reproduced PLIIx Music Processing is performed with the Music mode of the PLIIx decoder and the surround back channel is reproduced 53 Basic Operation 2 ch source OFF Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker ON Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker This operation can be performed directly pressing the SURROUND BACK button AFDM Auto Flag Detect Mode e ON This function only works with software on which a special identification signal is recorded This software is scheduled to go on sale in the future This is a function for automatically playing in the 6 1 channel mode using the surround back speaker s if the software is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES or in the normal 5 1 channel mode without using the surround back speaker s when the software is not recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES When AFDM is set to ON and the EX ES flag is detected automatically the surround mode is fixed according to the playing program source In this case the MODE SB CH OUT parameter can not be selected on the surround parameter screen
165. an only be selected when the surround back speaker configuration is set to 1spkr e The 72 73 mode can only be selected if the playback channels are configured as monaural Mono in the Channel Setup menu Front Bi Amp connections Certain loudspeakers are equipped with two sets of input terminals for bi amplification The AVR 4806CI Amp Assign mode allows you to power bi amp capable speakers with two amplifier channels Be sure to consult the operating instructions of your bi amp capable speakers for further information before proceeding AVR 4806CI m HOM MONITOR OUT Ca EA SPEAKER AG OUTLETS AC EE SWITCHED TOTAL 120W NA MAX mung NOTE e When making bi amp connections be sure to remove the short circuiting bar included with the speaker 117 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Volume Control e Set the upper limit for the volume the volume level when the power is turned on and the volume level when the mute mode is set for the different zones 1 Main Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Volume Control at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Volume Control screen 6 Option Setup 1 Channel Setup 2 Powe
166. and SR channels beforehand Upon playback they are decoded to the SL SR and SB channels The performance of the encoder used at the time of recording can be fully matched using a high precision digital matrix decoder developed by DTS thereby achieving surround sound more faithful to the producer s sound design aims than with conventional 5 1 or 6 1 channel systems In addition the bit stream format is 100 compatible with conventional DTS signals so the effect of the Matrix 6 1 format can be achieved even with 5 1 channel signal sources Of course it is also possible to play DTS ES Matrix 6 1 encoded sources with a DTS 5 1 channel decoder 150 When DTS ES Discrete 6 1 or Matrix 6 1 encoded sources are decoded with a DTS ES decoder the format is automatically detected upon decoding and the optimum playing mode is selected However some Matrix 6 1 sources may be detected as having a 5 1 channel format so the DTS ES Matrix 6 1 mode must be set manually to play these sources For instructions on selecting the surround mode ES page 53 The DTS ES decoder includes another function the DTS Neo 6 surround mode for 6 1 channel playback of digital PCM and analog signal sources DTS Neo 6 surround This mode applies conventional 2 channel signals to the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS ES Matrix 6 1 to achieve 6 1 channel surround playback High precision input signal detection and matrix processing enable full b
167. and reproduction frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater for all 6 1 channels and separation between the different channels is improved to the same level as that of a digital discrete system DTS Neo 6 surround includes two modes for selecting the optimum decoding for the signal source DTS Neo 6 Cinema This mode is optimum for playing movies Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same atmosphere with 2 channel sources as with 6 1 channel sources This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well because the in phase component is assigned mainly to the center channel C and the reversed phase component to the surround SL SR and SB channels DTS Neo 6 Music This mode is suited mainly for playing music The front channel FL and FR signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there is no loss of sound quality and the effect of the surround signals output from the center C and surround SL SR and SB channels add a natural sense of expansion to the sound field 4 DTS 96 24 The sampling frequency number of bits and number of channels used for recording of music etc in studios has been increasing in recent years and there are a growing number of high quality signal sources including 96 kHz 24 bit 5 1 channel sources For example there are high picture sound quality DVD video sources with 96 kHz 24 bit stereo PCM audio
168. ankook Hanseatic Hantarex Hantor Harley Davidson Harman Kardon Harsper Harvard Harwa Harwood Havermy HCM Helios Hello Kitty Hema Hemmermann Hher Higashi Hikona Himitsu H inari Hisawa SE isense Hit Hitachi Hitachi Fujian Hitsu HMV 10264 10217 10178 10060 10216 10218 11137 10037 10179 10054 10865 10180 10773 10009 10093 10009 10412 10865 10451 10009 10544 10714 10216 10218 10180 10009 10264 10218 10009 10508 10753 10087 10009 10036 10072 10151 10179 10361 10492 10576 10884 11156 10037 10009 10087 0019 0009 10320 10544 0009 10412 10817 10264 10217 0030 10056 0037 10087 10361 10377 10556 10634 0037 10102 10418 10606 10217 10628 10779 10036 10037 10355 10282 10455 10037 10145 10512 10556 10780 10821 10016 10019 10037 10092 10156 10186 10363 10499 10578 11037 11170 10108 10145 10218 10455 10193 10038 10105 10157 10194 10381 10508 10629 11045 11226 10178 10180 10628 10195 10217 10282 10394 10428 10499 10661 10714 10808 10238 10516 10865 10179 10610 10156 10696 10848 10027 10039 10108 10163 10217 10473 10512 10634 Misa 11256 10150 10610 10032 10037 10412 10487 10218 10235 10714 10208 10264 10706 10748
169. are several listening locations The effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at each person s ears are very different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded in a different way for every person in the room It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as large as 10 dB particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the room Because the room causes variations in the frequency response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat it is important to measure each loudspeaker at several locations in the listening room This should be done even if there is only one listener Measurement at a single location is not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will in most cases degrade overall performance Audyssey MultEO XT is the only technology that can achieve room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area It does so by combining the data collected at several points in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception known as psychoacoustics Furthermore MultEO XT correction is applied both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts such as smearing of sound or modal ringing that are sometimes
170. ased on this point Example Example 2 Easy Setup and Operation POWER CURSOR LA ON STANDBY ENTER SETUP MIC SYSTEM SETUP Connecting a microphone Connect the microphone for Auto Setup to the SETUP MIC jack on the front panel of the unit Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera tripod etc and place it at ear height at the main listening position in the listening room with the sound receptor facing the ceiling 20 AMP SYSTEM SETUP 95 wA CURSOR CD ENTER Xx When placing the microphone adjust the height so that the microphone s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of the listener X Be sure that at the beginning the measurement is started with the microphone set up at the main listening position x It is not possible to measure properly if there are any obstacles between the speakers and microphone Check that there are no obstacles Xx Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the microphone during the measurements NOTE e Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are completed e Do not change the connection of speakers or the subwoofer s volume after performing these measurements Easy Setup and Operation Turning on the power Starting Auto Setup 1 Xx Turn on your subwoofer Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover frequency to the maximum or Low pass filter off if
171. ations L Audio section Power amplifier Rated output Dynamic power Output terminals Analog Input sensitivity input impedance Frequency response S N Distortion Rated output Digital D A output Digital input Front 140 W 140 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 165 W 165 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D Center 140 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 165 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D Surround A B 140 W 140 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 165 W 165 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D Surround Back 140 W 140 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 165 W 165 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 180 W x2 ch 8 Q ohms 280 Wx 2ch 4 Q ohms Front Center Surr Back 6 16 Q ohms Surround AorB 6 16 Q ohms A B 8 16 Q ohms 200 mV 47 kQ kohms 10 Hz 100 kHz 0 3 dB DIRECT mode 102 dB DIRECT mode 0 005 20 Hz 20 kHz DIRECT mode 1 2V Rated output 2 V at O dB playback Total harmonic distortion 0 005 1 kHz at O dB S N ratio 110 dB Dynamic range 108 dB Format Digital audio interface Phono equalizer PHONO input REC OUT Input sensitivity RIAA deviation S N Rated output Maximum output Distortion factor O Video section Standard video terminals Input output level and impedance Frequency resp
172. bination x2 x3 Advent Apex Digital Audiovox Axion PRESET CODE 20739 20739 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 29r 21972 20616 20618 20739 20880 20614 20616 20614 20616 20636 21972 297 21972 20618 20636 20739 21008 21972 21972 41016 40830 41071 41121 41122 41071 Broksonic 40695 Optimus 20162 Bush 40516 40713 40884 Orion 20002 20479 21479 Denver 41353 41359 Panasonic 20162 21035 21308 Emerson 41268 Penney 20240 21035 21237 Go Vision 41071 Philco 20479 Grundig 40695 Quasar 20162 21035 Hitachi 41247 RadioShack 20000 Jensen 41016 RCA 20240 20807 21035 21060 Konka 40719 40720 Samsung 20432 21014 Panasonic 41490 Sansui 20000 20479 21479 Philips 40854 41260 Sanyo 20240 21330 Prima 41016 Sears 20000 21237 RCA 41022 Sharp 20807 Samsung 40899 Sony 20000 21232 21295 Sansui 40695 Sylvania 21781 Sova 41122 Symphonic 20000 Sylvania 40675 41268 Teac 20000 Toshiba 40695 Thomas 20000 Bush X3 10698 11037 Toshiba 20845 21145 21323 Denver X3 10587 Zenith 20000 20479 21479 Sylvania X3 10171 TV VCR DVD Combination 2 4 TV VCR Combination x3 x4 Akai 40899 America Action X3 10180 Broksonic 40868 Audiovox X3 10180 Emerson 40821 Emerson X3 10236 Funai 41334 Funai X3 Se Magnavox 40821 Panasonic 41362 41462 X4 RCA 41132 Aiwa 20000 20479 Sharp 40630 America Action 20278 Superscan 40821 Audiovox 20278 Sylvania 40821 Broksonic 20002 20479 21479 Toshiba 4104
173. cD laver E 30 Memory and call out functions USER MODE function 60 n g 3 Y Ind OU NEUEN NEUEN ENSE DENON original surround modes es ing EE Surround modes and their features e a 61 Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder m9 HSE sumeund sim lanoh 62 63 Connecting a tape deck 34 usce o 0 DIU S DENON LINK connection AA 34 SU as creme 63 64 Tone defeat mode TOA Cc A mc 64 kade mfu O oadaedion TET 65 to be continued on page 6 Q System Setup Menu d 2 Speaker Setup 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 71 Auto Setup Room EQssssasaan T wb 2 Auto S BE fy Saeed A ggg Page 19 25 2 Speaker Setup a 2 Room EQ Setup 77 cg Page 134 3 Audio Input Setupimmagman z 3 Direct Mode Setup f 75 page 135 4 Video Setupmsmmsuuuuuuun E 4 Mic Input Select cke cg page 135 5 Advanced Playbacks m 5 Parameter Check re i gt page 136 137 6 Option Setupmmau y n CS i 7 Network Setupma m Exit Exit m m m E m m m m m m m m m m m m LI m m 7 m mi Speaker Config zz Ce Page 125 126 2 Subwoofer Setup 71 ue Page 126 127 i c lay us EE Tae page 127 128 m Channe evel eens 128 1 J 5 Crossover Frequency t SUB oe oa 6 Surround Sp Setup 1257 Page 130 131 7 THX Audio Setup 711 4787 page 131 132 L Exit page 132 133 L z 3 Audio Input Setup D n Fl Digital
174. cable Audio signal j ms IN OUT OUT IN Video signal mmm IN OUT OUT IN NOTE e Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections h Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly left in generating hum or other noise ave been completed When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the other components with left right with right Note that binding pin plug cables together with power supply cords or placing them near a power transformer will result NOTE Connecting a LD laser disc player with a Dolby Digital demodulator s operating instruction for further information RF Output The AVR 4806CI does not have a DD RF demodulator function Therefore you need to use a commercially available outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its digital output to one of the AVR 4806CI available digital inputs Refer to the 26 The video conversion function e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals Because of this the AVR 4806Cl s MONITOR OUT terminal can be connected to the TV monitor with a set of cables offering a higher quality connection regardless of how the player and the AVR 4806Cl s video input terminals are connected Generally speaking analog video connections using the component video terminals offer the highest quality playback followed by connections using the S Video terminals
175. capability can better handle deep bass than most main and surround speakers and the system s overall performance will be greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main front and surround speakers x To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems set the front center and surround speaker size parameters to Small and the subwoofer to Yes For the majority of speaker system configurations using the SMALL setting for all main and surround speakers and connected subwoofer s set to ON will yield the best results When Front is set to Small Subwoofer is automatically set to Yes and when Subwoofer is set to No Front is automatically set to Large Setting the low frequency distribution e Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker system being used Select the play mode that provides bass reproduction with body 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Subwoofer Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Subwoofer Setup screen 2 Speaker Setup Speaker Config 2 2 Subwoofer Setup 1 2 Subwoofer Setup 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level 5 6 7 E CrSubwoofer Mode 4 LFE Main Crossover Frequenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup xit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting LFE THX For any chan
176. cast has been received STEREO indicator This lights when an FM stereo broadcast has been received 6 Getting Started Remote control unit e For details on the functions of these parts refer to the pages given in parentheses Remote control signal transmitter IR segment FUE E a E un oo Si H lt H INPUT MODE selector button lt USER MODE SYSTEM CALL buttons Tuner system buttons TEST TONE button SPEAKER button Power buttons RC SETUP button NOTE e With the AVR 4806Cl the ZONE4 VCR 4 and ZONE2 surround mode buttons cannot be used e For instructions on setting the remote control unit back light s lighting time 128 page 87 RC 1036 12 Easy Setup and Operation e This section contains the basic steps necessary to configure the AVR 4806CI according to your listening room environment and the source equipment and loudspeakers you are using e For optimum performance we recommend using the Auto Setup function e f you wish you can set the various settings manually without using Auto Setup ES page 125 133 Easy to setup flow U Auto setup flow 58 Placing the speakers Connecting the speakers Perform the auto setup procedure following the instructions displayed on the TV s screen Connect the DVD play
177. ce to indicate that the code is successfully captured Other remote control unit Other buttons can be learned by repeating steps 4 and 5 X The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button f the IR segment displays one long flash a leaning error has occurred Try repeating this step again until a successful capture occurs Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds to exit programming I e To cancel the learning setup mode press the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e Do not try to learn anything to the RC SETUP button IR segment AMP MODE SELECTOR SYSTEM CALL 2 2 83 NUMBER RC SETUP System call e The accessories remote control unit is equipped with system call function allowing a series of remote control signals to be transmitted by pressing a single button e This function can be used for example to turn on the amplifier s power select the input source turn on the monitor or TV s power turn on the source component s power and set the source to the play mode all at the touch of a single button L System call buttons e Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1 3 buttons e The System Call function can be used in the SYSTEM CALL mode L Storing system call signals Press and holed the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 8 button 9
178. channels and the in phase component of the left and right channels is output to the center channel Use this mode to enjoy stereo sound 9 7CH STEREO Depending on the program source being played the effect may not be very noticeable In this case try other surround modes without worrying about their names to create a sound field suited to your tastes NOTE When playing sources recorded in monaural the sound will be one sided if signals are only input to one channel left or right so input signals to both channels If you have a source component with only one audio output monophonic camcorder etc obtain a Y adaptor cable to split the mono output to two outputs and connect to the L and R inputs L Personal Memory Plus This set is equipped with a personal memorize function that automatically memorizes the surround modes and input modes selected for the input different sources When the input source is switched the modes set for that source last time it was used are automatically recalled The surround parameters tone control settings and playback level balance for the different output channels are memorized for each surround mode 61 Basic Operation SURROUND 7CH STEREO ENTER PARAMETER DSP SIMULATION CURSOR DSP surround simulation Select the surround mode for each input channel Example DSP surround simulation mode ES N Remote control unit DSP SIMULATION X Main un
179. character number symbol or BIM 520kHz ON punctuation mark you wish to input and press oy ee the CURSOR or V button to select that B 4AM 1400khz ON character B5M 1500kHz ON B6M 1710khHz ON B7FM 90 10M ON ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW Y Ber 90 TOM ON XYZabcdefghijkImnopqrstuvwxy 20123456789 I 965 amp 22 Q space t is also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting Block then pressing the CURSOR or D button 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 X Up to 8 characters can be input Press the ENTER button Return to the Tuner Presets screen 104 Repeat step 3 to input the preset channel name X To reset the input source name to the default value press the CURSOR lt or P button to highlight the input source display then press the CURSOR V button When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default name 3 7 Preset Name 3 7 Preset Name CE WMJ X FM IA lr WMJX FM gt Default GE Default Yesd 5 Once all the characters have been input press the ENTER button e The Preset Name screen reappears Xx Use the same procedure to change other input station names as well When the CURSOR V button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen e The screen for the next preset memory block appears 3 7 Preset Name Block E B TAM 5 2
180. cked using the STATUS button on the main unit or the ON SCREEN button on the remote control unit P e f you do not want to use the function for converting analog video signals to HDMI signals select OFF for Analog to HDMI Convert at Setting the HDMI Out Setup 127 page 108 109 In this case the function for video up conversion to the component video terminal operates On screen display for component video outputs and HDMI output e When viewing component video signals or HDMI signals via the AVR 4806CI the on screen display is displayed on the monitor when the System Setup operations are performed and when the remote control unit s ON SCREEN button is operated e To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor set Analog to HDMI Convert at HDMI Out Setup to ON default e When only component video signals are input to the AVR 4806CI the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the picture Connecting Other Sources Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a function for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals You can do this by either a component or a video or a S Video connection e Audio signals are not output from the HDMI monitor output terminal so also make analog or digital audio connections To play sound using digital audio connections assign the digital
181. connections both the player and receiver must be compatible with the DTCP Digital Transmission Content Protection system DTCP is a copy protection technology that involves data encryption and authentication of the other device Refer to your player s operating instructions HDMI is the abbreviation of High Definition Multimedia Interface This is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs developed based on the DVI Digital Visual Interface used for computer displays etc and optimized for use in non professional equipment With it non compressed digital video and multi channel audio signals can be transferred with a single connector eliminating the need to use separate cables for the picture and sound and making it possible to make connectors smaller HDMI is also compatible with HDCP High bandwidth Digital Contents Protection a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI Homi e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC AL24 Plus AL24 Processing Plus The AVR 4806CI s IEEE1394 device interface is designed based on the standards below 1 IEEE Std 1394a 2000 Standard for High Performance Serial Bus 2 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2 0 It is compatible with IEC60958 bit stream DVD Audio and Super Audio CD within AM824 sequence adaptation
182. correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On the AVR 4806CI when the Home THX Cinema mode is on THX post processing is automatically added after the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital or DTS decoder L Re EQ Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack in a normal home environment O Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theater there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theater only two speakers located to the side of your head are used The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers L Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theater a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience while in a home theater there are usually only two Speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spacious
183. d Starlite PRESET CODE 01214 00613 00157 01251 00132 00863 01474 00115 00132 00243 00114 01087 00592 00885 00610 00136 01251 00494 00173 00299 00713 00587 00713 01449 01334 00132 00692 00157 00115 00829 00275 00492 00847 00132 00887 00869 00180 01122 00200 00668 00157 00885 00299 00421 00396 00369 01191 00871 01205 00592 01517 0 07 11 01847 01848 01412 00587 01085 01334 290 15 00243 00587 00132 00882 00282 00493 00853 00243 00421 00710 00805 00898 01206 00587 01075 01105 00515 00421 01251 00713 00847 01848 00605 01200 01409 00501 00299 00713 00299 01101 00292 00494 01524 00605 00607 00692 01083 01111 01334 01206 01283 00605 00742 01075 01856 01409 01412 00856 00628 00605 00692 01200 00396 01113 00294 00496 01558 00887 00713 00607 00742 01409 00713 01232 00486 00500 01639 01014 00880 00713 01294 00794 01273 00489 00639 01640 Stream Strong Ss STVI Sunkai Sunny Sunny Sound Sunsat Sunstar Supermax Supernova Tantec Tarbs Tatung TEL Teac Techniland TechniSat Technomate Technosat Technotrend Technowelt Techsan Techwood Teco tekComm Telasat eleciel Telefunken eleka
184. d into 2 channel analog signals he recording signals are output to the TAPE and VCR output terminals Down mixed analog signals converted into digital signals are output from the OPTICAL 2 3 and 4 digital output terminals at this time Press the ZONE3 REC SELECT button until RECOUT SOURCE appears on the display Press the INPUT MODE button to set the input mode according to the source to be played Press the DIRECT STEREO button to set the surround mode e The multichannel digital signals are down mixed and output to the TAPE and VCR output terminals 4 Set the recording mode L Dolby Headphone recording e When REC OUT mode is set to SOURCE with the AVR 4806CI it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder 1 The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack during playback in the DOLBY DTS surround mode When this is done signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode are automatically output from the recording output terminals analog and digital and can be recorded Select the parameters and set the desired mode e Start recording x Refer to the Dolby Headphone IS page 59 NOTE Do not disconnect the headphones during recording Advanced Operation POWER DIRECT STEREO PURE DIRECT Last Function Memory This un
185. dB 7 Press the ENTER button e The surround parameter menu screen re appears 8 Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting L Tone defeat mode e f you do not want the bass and treble to be adjusted turn on the tone defeat mode Press the TONE DEFEAT button to turn on the Tone Defeat mode Xx The signals do not pass through the bass and treble adjustment circuits providing higher quality sound TU e TUNING ME MODE CH SEL ENTER Di cursor SURROUND SS PARAMETER Channel Level e You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes as described below Press the CH SEL ENTER button Display the Channel Vol screen Channel Vol oe SBR OB SBL 0B SL Fader FRONT 4 REAR Channels which is not used are not displayed 2 Press the CURSOR A V or CH SEL ENTER button to select the speaker X The channel switches as shown below each time the CH SEL ENTER button is pressed FLA C HFR SW P SR X X SMS SBL SBR 4 D FADER 3 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the level X The adjustment range for the different channels is 12 dB to 12 dB in step of 0 5 dB The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by lowering the SW subwoofer setting one additional from 12 dB settin
186. de the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart you will need to go THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three new modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode L Boundary Gain Compensation If your chosen listening room layout for practical or aesthetic reasons results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes boomy THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC Boundary Gain Compensation feature to provide an improved bass balance BGC can be selected by choosing THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Yes from the Boundary Gain Compensation section of the THX Audio setup menu THX and Re EO THX Timbre Matching THX Adaptive Decorrelation and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved 6 THX Sur
187. dialog normalization offset value ES page 55 FLAG Displays the special identification signal recorded in the input signal ES page 53 MATRIX is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing DISCRETE is displayed if the input signal has undergone discrete processing Not displayed when no identification signal is recorded Basic Operation STATUS HOME THX SURROUND CINEMA BACK e n addition screen information is displayed in the following order when the ON SCREEN button is pressed repeatedly OSD 1 Audio input signal OSD 2 Monitor information OSD 3 Input output OSD 4 Auto surround mode OSD 5 USER MODE 1 OSD 6 USER MODE 2 OSD 7 USER MODE 3 OSD 8 14 Tuner preset stations Mode Dolby Digital EX Mode DTS ES DSCRT6 1 RoomEQ OFF RoomEQ OFF SIGNAL DOLBY DIGITAL SIGNAL DTS fs 48kHz fs 48kHz FORMAT 3 2 1 FORMAT 3 3 1 OFFSET 4dB FLAG DISCRETE J NOTE e OSD 2 The monitor s resolution is displayed when an HDMI monitor is connected to the AVR 4806CI e OSD 4 This is displayed when the auto surround mode is set to ON CG page 112 and the input mode is set to AUTO It is not displayed when the input mode is set to ANALOG or EXT IN 52 HOME THX CINEMA ON SCREEN L To play in the THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS
188. do not disconnect the AM loop antenna Make sure AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel Connecting Other Sources Connecting the XM terminal e AVR 4806CI is the XM Ready receiver You can receive XMQ Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Passport System sold separately and subscribing to the XM service e Plug the XM Passport System into XM terminal on the rear panel Position the XM Passport System near a south facing window to receive the best signal For details see XM Satellite Radio 1257 page 71 72 When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Passport System XM Passport System NOTE Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Passport System connection has been completed The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved Connecting the CONTROL terminals These terminals are used for an external controller Perform the following operation before using an external controller connected to the RS 232C terminal 1 Press the ON STANDBY button on the main unit and set the unit to the operating mode 2 Perform the operation to turn off the ka power from the external control La 3 Check that the product has been set to
189. e 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select On Screen Display at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the On Screen Display screen 4 Video Setup 4 6 On Screen Display 1 HDMI DVI 2 Component 3 Video Convert Mode 4 HDMI Out Setup 5 Audio Delay EF6 On Screen Display In Assign In Assig Function Mode Status ON 4 gt OFF Master Volume Status ON lt OFF Exit Display Mode MEES Mode2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR or gt button to select the parameter Function Mode Status Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the input source name and input mode when an input source is selected Master Volume Status Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the main volume level when the main volume is operated Display Mode Mode 1 Flickering is not prevented Mode 2 Prevents flickering of the on screen display when there is no video signal Use this mode if the on screen display does not appear in the Mode 1 as may happen according to the TV being used Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears 110 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 4 Video Setup
190. e B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada L NOTE ON USE OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L UTILISATION Avoid high temperatures Keep the apparatus free from moisture water and dust Prot ger l appareil contre l humidit l eau et la poussi re Do not let foreign objects into the apparatus Ne pas laisser des objets trangers dans l appareil Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack Eviter des temp ratures lev es Tenir compte d une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l installation sur une D brancher tag re Le Ww Unplug the power cord when not using the apparatus for long periods of time le cordon d alimentation lorsque l appareil n est pas utilis pendant de longues p riodes Do not let insecticides benzene and thinner come in contact with the apparatus Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides du benz ne et un diluant avec l appareil Handle the power cord carefully Hold the plug when unplugging the cord Manipuler le cordon d alimentation avec pr caution Tenir la prise lors du d branchement du For apparatuses with ventilation holes cordon Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Ne pas obstruer les trous d a ration Never disassemble or modify the apparatus in any way Ne jamais d monter ou modifier l appareil d une mani re ou d une autre 10 Fb 12
191. e OFF When the identification signal is detected automatically and you would like to select the surround mode freely set AFDM to OFF In this case the MODE SB CH OUT parameter can be selected on the surround parameter screen regardless of the playing program source Basic Operation SURROUND STANDARD ENTER PARAMETER CURSOR SURROUND BACK Example When playing software that has a Dolby Digital EX flag D When AFDM is set to ON the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx CINEMA mode The surround parameter screen shown at the below is displayed DOLBY D PLIIx C N E CINEMAJE Q 4 OFF gt D COMP OFF gt Wu Y E LFE 4 04 KON FLAG DET an t P LII x CINEMA C Default Yes4 2 When you would like to play back with the Dolby Digital EX mode set AFDM to OFF and select MTRX ON with SB CH OUT Dolby Digital EX B CINEMA JE Q 4 OFF gt D COMP t d wg LEE 4 08 TONE 4 D HAF DM or B 0 i SB CH OUT an 1 4MTRX_ON EI X Some discs recorded in Dolby Digital EX do not include EX flag If the playing mode does not switch automatically when the AFDM turns ON during playback manually set SB CH OUT to PLIIx Cinema or MTRX ON Lt STANDARD NIGHT CS ENTER PS CHj CURSOR SURROUND oO s PARAMETER
192. e crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to ON and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL as described in section Speaker Configuration settings CS page 125 126 L Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select Advanced at the Crossover Frequency screen 2 5 Crossover Frequency ma Advanced L Front Small 8 0Hz Center Small 4 8 0Hz Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Small 4 80Hz S Back Small 4 80Hz LFE 80Hz J Press the CURSOR or V button to select the speaker to be set 2 5 Crossover Frequency 4 Advanced gt EFront Small 4 8 0Hz Center Small 4 80Hz Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Small 4 80Hz S Back Small 4 80Hz LFE 80Hz _ 131 Advanced Setup Part 2 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the frequency 2 5 Crossover Frequency 4 Advanced GFront Small 41 0 0Hz Center Small 80Hz Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Small 4 80Hz S Back Small 80Hz L LFE 80Hz elf LFE THX is selected at Subwoofer Setup the frequencies can only be selected for speakers set to Small at Speaker Configuration 2 5 Crosso
193. e sensor on the main unit as shown on the diagram The remote control unit can be used from a straight distance of approximately 23 feet 7 meters from the main unit but this distance will be shorter if there are obstacles in the way or if the remote control unit is not pointed directly at the remote sensor The remote control unit can be operated at a horizontal angle of up to 30 degrees with respect to the remote sensor NOTE t may be difficult to operate the remote control unit if the remote sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light Do not press buttons on the main unit and remote control unit simultaneously Doing so may result in malfunction Neon signs or other devices emitting pulse type noise nearby may result in malfunction so keep the set as far away from such devices as possible Part names and functions Front panel e For details on the functions of these parts refer to the pages given in parentheses DENON MASTER VOLUME Getting Started PURE DIRECT SURROUND MODE MODE ANALOG EXT IN SYSTEM UP PHONES INPUT O Power ON STANDBY switch 21 O Power indicator www wwwwww 21 Power Switch 21 9
194. e the HDMI logo non HDMI certified product is used 35 Connecting Other Sources Connecting equipment with DVI terminals e Connection with equipment that has a DVI Digital Visual Interface D connector permits the transfer of digital images Make an analog or digital audio connection also TV Monitor HDMI D EE n DVD player OPTICAL COAXIAL m OUT Al AUDIO OUT DA O N y e When connecting via a DVI D cable no digital audio will be output from the HDMI Monitor Out connector e f your digital TV monitor or DVD player only supports DVI D please obtain and use an HDMI DVI conversion cable or adaptor available from your dealer NOTE e Commercially available DVI cables are available in 24 pin and 29 pin types The AVR 4806CI supports the 24 pin DVI D cable e The AVR 4806CI supports HDCP Use an HDCP compatible HDMI monitor L Connections with an HDMI DVI D conversion cable adapter e The HDMI video stream signals video signals are theoretically compatible with DVI D When connecting to a monitor etc equipped with DVI D terminals it is possible to connect using an HDMI DVI D conversion cable but depending on the combination of devices used the image might not be output When using an HDMI DVI D conversion adapter the image may not be output properly due to poor contact with the connected cable etc 36 Connecting Other Sourc
195. e used when the PURE DIRECT mode is set To use the system setup function cancel the PURE DIRECT mode e f the HDMI input terminal is selected video outputs are outputted in the PURE DIRECT mode e The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema mode e When the HOME THX CINEMA button is pressed the surround mode is set as follows according to the signal that is played D THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema 2 Home THX CINEMA PLIIx C THX 3 THX 5 1 4 ES DSCRT 6 1 THX ES MTRX 6 1 THX When the HOME THX CINEMA mode is set when a DVD is played check the DVD player s digital output setting and change the setting to one for which Dolby Digital and DTS bit stream signals can be output bit stream for example L Playing sources recorded in Dolby Surround in the Home THX Cinema Surround mode Press the HOME THX CINEMA button to select Home THX Cinema mode Play a program source with the I peusv surround mark Xx For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button Display the Surround Parameter menu PLIIx C THX mm I7 DECODER 4 PLIx C gt au E MODE 4 SB ON gt Default Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR or gt button
196. ead e Replace with new batteries 8 EE Remote control unit too far from this unit Move closer 9 Mio bo MESE Obstacle between this unit and remote control e Remove obstacle 9 properly when remote control unit unit is used ES e Different button is being pressed e Press the proper button e and O ends of battery inserted in reverse Insert batteries properly 8 141 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Measures Page e AVR 4806Cl s HDMI output terminals and Check the HDMI connection 35 36 monitor s input terminals are not properly connected No HDMI DVI D signal is being input e Properly select HDMI or DVI D signal input 106 107 An image is not projected with j SOUTE F f e The connected monitor equipment or other e The AVR 4806CI will not output video signal 35 36 an HDMI DVI D connection i equipments do not support HDCP unless the other equipment supports HDCP e The output format of the connected player e Check whether the output format of the 35 36 HDMI DVI D FORMAT does not matche the connected player HDMI DVI D FORMAT supported input format of connected monitor matches the supported input format of equipments connected monitor equipments e The AVR 4806CI does not play HDMI audio e Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the NA signals HDMI DVI In Assign settings to AMP EE E REES e The HDMI audio signals are not output from e
197. eas with conventional Dolby Pro Logic the surround channel playback frequency band was limited Dolby Pro Logic II offers a wider band range 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater In addition the surround channels were monaural the surround left and right channels were the same with previous Dolby Pro Logic but Dolby Pro Logic II they are played as stereo signals Various parameters can be set according to the type of source and the contents so it is possible to achieve optimum decoding IGS page 57 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx furthers the matrix decoding technology of Dolby Pro Logic II to decode audio signals recorded on two channels into up to 7 1 playback channels including the surround back channel Dolby Pro Logic IIx also allows 5 1 channel sources to be played in up to 7 1 channels The mode can be selected according to the source The Music mode is best suited for playing music the Cinema mode for playing movies and the Game mode for playing games The Game mode can only be used with 2 channel audio sources 148 Sources recorded in Dolby Surround These are sources in which three or more channels of surround have been recorded as two channels of signals using Dolby Surround encoding technology Dolby Surround is used for the sound tracks of movies recorded on DVDs LDs and video cassettes to be played on stereo VCRs as well as for the stereo broadcast signals of FM radio TV satellite broadcasts and cable TV
198. ed Playback 6 H E m1 2 Component n Assign 3 Video Convert Mode 4 5 6 HDMI Out Setup Audio Delay On Screen Display Option Setup Network Setup xit Exit Press the CURSOR or V button to select HDMI DVI In Assign then press the ENTER button Display the HDMI DVI In Assign screen 4 Video Setup 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 51 HDMI DVI In Assign ov NONE gt 2 Component n Assig VDP NONE 3 Video Convert Mode TV NONE 4 HDMI Out Setup 585 NONE 5 Audio Delay VOR NONE 6 On Screen Display WS NONE VCR3 NONE Exit VA NONE 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input terminal Select from among HDMI1 to 3 and DVI D X Ifthe same HDMI or DVI input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to NONE 106 Press the CURSOR or V button to select the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal then press the CURSOR or gt button to select AMP or Coy YER AMP Play the audio signals on speakers connected to the AVR 4806CI TV Play the audio signals on a TV connected to the AVR 4806C 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign DVD HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI3 HDMI DVI D GlAudio AMP gt NONE No Signal NO
199. ed on the on screen display Press the ON SCREEN button in the AMP mode repeatedly until the Tuner Preset Stations screen appears on the OSD Tuner Preset Stations ATRM 87 50MHz A2FM 89 10MHz A3FM 98 10MHz A4FM1 07 90MHz A5FM 90 10MHz AGM 90 10MHz ATFM 90 10MHz A8FM 90 10MHz Recalling preset stations L Recalling preset stations from the remote control unit e Preset stations can be chosen directly preset channel and channel range button IG page 82 7 Select the MEMORY BLOCK A to G Watching the display press the CHANNEL button to select the desired preset channel L Recalling preset stations from the main unit s panel 7 Press the TUNING PRESET button Turn the FUNCTION knob and select the desired preset channel 67 e RDS works only on the FM band is a broadcasting service which allows station to send additional information along with the regular radio program signal e The following three types of RDS information can be received on this unit L Program Type PTY e PTY identifies the type of RDS program e The program types and their displays are as follows NEWS INFORM SPORTS TALK ADLT HIT TOP 40 ROCK CLS ROCK SOFT RCK COUNTRY SOFT OLDIES News Information Sports Talk Rock Classic rock Adult hits Soft rock Top 40 Country Oldies Soft L Traffic Program TP NOSTALGA JAZZ
200. emory 1 Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER SE mode Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER RN mode Remote control unit Press the MEMORY button Remote control unit Watching the display press the BAND button 4 Press the MEMORY BLOCK A to G button C N to select the desired band AM FM or XM x The memory block can also be selected by pressing E s A the SHIFT button x When listening to the XM satellite Radio I gt page d iod un Press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER 1 to Press the MODE button to set the manual tuning 8 button to select the desired preset channel mode A Press the MEMORY button again x Check that the display s AUTO indicator turns off Store the station in the preset memory 5 Press the TUNING button to tune in the desired station To preset other channels repeat steps 2 to 5 A total of 56 broadcast stations can be preset 8 stations X The frequency changes continuously when the button i u channels 1 to 8 in each of blocks A to G is held in e When the manual tuning mode is set FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the STEREO indicator turns off 66 Basic Operation Checking the preset stations RDS Radio Data System e The preset broadcast stations can be check
201. en Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default input source name 3 4 Function Rename 3 4 Function Rename DND 4DVD 5910 DND 4DVD 5910 Default Yesd Gr Default Yes Once all the characters have been input press the ENTER button he Function Rename screen reappears x Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Audio Input Setup menu reappears e When the input source is selected the display is as shown below Example When the name has been changed to DVD 5910 ya AUTO DVD 5910 STEREO Input Mode M 102 Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment Assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source The power of the device to be assigned must be turned on ahead of time 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select EEE1394 Assign at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the IEEE1394 Assign screen 3 Audio Input Setup 3 5 IEEE1394 Assign Digital In Assign EXT IN Setup e11 Input Function Lev 12 Function Rename IEEE1394 Assign IEEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit DVD 3910 DVD 5910 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the d
202. ening room sound field The AVR 4806Cl ss surround speaker selection function makes it possible to change the settings according to the combination of surround speakers being used and the surrounding environment in order to achieve the ideal surround sound for all sources This means that you can connect a pair of bipolar or dipolar surround speakers mounted on either side of the prime listening position as well as a separate pair of direct radiating monopolar speakers placed at the rear corners of the listening room Multiple surround speakers In this case it is important to achieve the same sense of expansion as in a movie theater with the surround channels To do so in some cases the number of surround speakers is increased to four or eight or speakers with bipolar or dipolar properties are used SL Surround L channel SR Surround R channel SB Surround B back channel 143 Additional Information Surround back speakers The THX Surround EX format adds new Surround Back SB channels to the conventional 5 1 channel system This makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional multi surround speakers In addition the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds movi
203. ennas or 300 Q ohms feeder wires We recommend using outdoor antennas and 75 Q ohms coaxial cables Note For heat dispersal do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a book case or similar unit A Note To Wall Getting Started Cautions on handling Switching the input function when input terminals are Whenever the power switch is in the STANDBY state not connected the apparatus is still connected on AC line voltage A clicking noise may be produced if the input function is Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug Switched when nothing is connected to the input terminals the cord when you leave home for say a vacation If this happens either turn down the MASTER VOLUME control knob or connect components to the input terminals Muting of PRE OUT terminals and SPEAKER terminals The PRE OUT terminals and SPEAKER terminals include a muting circuit Because of this the output signals are greatly reduced for several seconds after the power switch is turned on or input function surround mode or any other set up is changed If the volume is turned up during this time the output will be very high after the muting circuit stops functioning Always wait until the muting circuit turns off before adjusting the volume Preparing the remote control unit e The included remote control unit RC 1036 can be used to operate not only the AVR 4
204. er EE Setup 6 Surround Sp Setup p 7 THX Audio Setup Exit Center Sp Si E Front Sp 125 Subwoofer Surround Sp A e o o D Surround back Sp ada 5 Surround Sp B Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 2 P e Select Large or Small not according to the actual size of the speaker but according to the speaker s capacity for playing low frequency bass sound below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency signals If you do not know try comparing the sound at both settings setting the volume to a level low enough so as not to damage the speakers to determine the proper setting L Parameters Large Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep bass well below 80 Hz Small Select this when using speakers that are not capable of handling deep bass well below 80 Hz Most home theater main and surround speakers perform best when configured as SMALL Deep bass content in any channel with a SMALL speaker is routed to the subwoofer s None Select this when no speakers are installed Yes No Select Yes when a subwoofer is installed No when a subwoofer is not installed 2spkrs 1spkr Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back channel A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback
205. er Audio Stereo area x ens CD CD area O The AVR 4806C is HDMI Ver 1 1 compatible NOTE e The audio signals on the multi stereo area of Super Audio CDs are not output If the Super Audio CD is a hybrid CD only the audio signals in the CD area are output Use a compatible player to play DVD Audio discs that are copyright protected by CPPM e Among the devices that support HDMI some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector however the AVR 4806CI cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI connector e The audio signals from the HDMI connector including the sampling frequency and bit length may be limited by the equipment that is connected e The video signals are not output properly if a device not compatible with HDCP is used e When Through is set at Resolution under Setting the HDMI Out Setup use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 4801 5761 e The video signals input from the HDMI or DVI D input terminals are output to the HDMI monitor with their original resolution so the image will not be displayed if the resolutions of the input signal and the monitor being used are not matched In this case change the setting of the resolution on the source device player to one which the monitor can handle e Use a cable including the HDMI logo HDMI certified product for connection of the HDMI terminal Normal playback may not be possible if a cable that does not includ
206. er to 2 Connecting a microphone CS page 20 Perform the preliminary measurements AVR 4806CI Connect the AVR 4806CI s monitor output terminal to the TV s video input terminal IS page 17 1 Measuring the background noise noise in the room 2 Determining whether or not speakers are connected 3 Checking the polarities of the speakers The measurement of the speakers in the main listening position Speaker Configuration Speaker distance Channel Level Crossover Frequency Room EQ Y Check of the measurement result 0 Store the measurement result in the memory E Play a DVD 13 Easy Setup and Operation Speaker system layout L Basic system layout For a THX Ultra2 system The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems and a television monitor Subwoofer Center speaker system Surround back speaker systems Front speaker systems Set these at the sides of the TV or screen with their front surfaces as flush with the front of the screen as possible Surround speaker systems Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance f
207. er video source the picture on the monitor may seem delayed with respect to the sound In this case adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize it with the picture The audio delay setting is stored separately for each input source 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Audio Delay at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Audio Delay screen 4 Video Setup HDMI DVI 4 5 Audio Delay Component 1 In Assign 2 In Assig 3 Video Convert Mode 4 HDMI Out Setup EF5 Audio Delay 6 On Screen Display DVD Input Source 4 Oms gt Exit 1 Press the CURSOR lt 1 or gt button to set the delay time 0 ms 200 ms Xx With a movie source for example adjust so that the movement of the actors lips is synchronized with the sound Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Video Setup menu reappears P e The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT IN mode or in the analog input direct mode or stereo mode only when the crossover frequency is set to FIXED THX TONE DEFEAT ON Room EQ OFF By default this menu is not displayed when no digital signals are being input Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the On Screen Display OSD Use this to turn the on screen display messages other than the menu screens on or off e Sets the on screen display s display mod
208. erent input sources 1 RCA 2 RCA 3 RCA NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE Video Convert This sets whether or not to use the video conversion ON 107 Mode unction This sets whether or not to use the function for converting A 3 Convert ON analog video composite video S Video or component Aspect Full HDMI Out video signals into HDMI signals h d E A e e Resolution 480p 576p 108 109 Assign When using this conversion function set the aspect ratio Color Space Y Cb Cr set the resolution set the color format and video range of BGB Mode Normal the signals output from the HDMI terminal Audio Delay Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and 0 ms 109 video On Screen This sets whether or not to display the on screen display A that appears on the monitor screen when the controls on Function Mode ON Master Volume ON Mode Mode 1 110 Display s the remote control unit or main unit are operated Advanced Playback Advanced Playback Default settings Page 2ch The speaker settings can be changed specifically for Basic 111 Direct Stereo playing in the 2 channel direct or stereo mode Dolby Digital Turn the audio compression on or off when down mixing Ge OFF 112 Setup Dolby Digital signals Auto Surround Set the Auto surround mode function Auto Surround Mode ON 112 Mode Manual EQ This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which E Setup the audio signals are produced from the speake
209. es Connecting IEEE1394 devices e For the digital transfer of signals from Super Audio CDs and DVD Audio discs connect using an IEEE1394 cable For instructions on playing Super Audio CDs IG page 94 e Assign the IEEE1394 input the input source For details see Setting the IEEE1394 Assign IGS page 102 DVD player D a ke MT gt IEEE1394 L IEEE1394 network D Up to 17 devices can be connected using daisy chain type connections 2 Up to 63 devices can be connected using tree type connections Do not loop the connections 3 LINK CHECK is displayed when an input source to which an IEEE1394 is assigned is selected and connection to the IEEE1394 device is being checked 4 If the connection is looped LOOP CONNECT is displayed Check the connections and undo the loop NOTE e Do not use an IEEE1394 cable to connect the AVR 4806CI with a computer e The AVR 4806CI will not operate when connected to equipment other than that conforming to IEEE1394 AUDIO A amp M protocol standards or when connected to computer peripherals Also please note that operation is not guaranteed even when connected to IEEE1394 compatible equipment Whether or not data and control signals can be sent and received between interconnected IEEE1394 compatible equipment depends on the functions of the different equipment Please read the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected Use an S400 compatible 4 pin IEEE1394 cable
210. es is selected Boundary Gain Compensation can be selected and the compensation set to OFF lt If the bass sound seems too strong Set Boundary Gain Compensation to ON This activates a filter that gently reduces very deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass response Select ON or OFF according to how strong you prefer the deep bass response to be 2 7 THX Audio Setup Do You Have GA THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Or Sub That Extends To 20Hz ES No Boundary Gai Compensatio 0 OFF Press the ENTER button Return to the THX Audio Setup screen Advanced Setup Part 2 L Surround Back Speaker Position Settings e When two Get back speakers have Gs set in Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Speaker Configuration IGP page 125 126 set the Exit then press the ENTER button distance of the speakers This option is not available when The System Setup Menu reappears 1spkr is selected This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode It is recommended that SBL SBR speakers are placed together as close as possible 2 Speaker Setup 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Setup 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level 5 Crossover Frequency 6 Surround Sp Setup 7 THX Audio Setup 1 Press the CURSOR or V b
211. etup Delay Time Level Crossover Frequenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup xit Ed 9 Manual Test Tone Surr Sp WB A B Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear Yesjd Press the CURSOR 1 or gt button to select Auto or Manual Auto Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker Manual Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level Example When the Auto mode is selected ET 2 4 Channel Level GTest Tone NG veel Surf Sip ms A B Test Tone Start Yesj4 Level Clear Yes 4 J Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Surr Sp then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the surround speaker s from which you want to produce the test tone A B or A B Surr Sp A Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speaker A Surr Sp B Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speaker B Surr Sp A B Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speakers A and B at the same time The Surr Sp can only be selected when both surround speakers A and B have been selected at t
212. evice to be assigned to the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input source 3 5 EEE1394 Assign DG DVD 3910 4 DVD 5910 11 12 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears If you do not wish to assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source the IEEE1394 input can be selected by turning the FUNCTION knob In this case the connection information is cleared when the power of the connected device or the AVR 4806CI is turned off so the selection procedure must be performed again By default if no device has been connected using an IEEE1394 cable in the past No Connection is displayed Connection Change is displayed if there is a change in the IEEE1394 connection status while this screen is displayed If the model name cannot be acquired from the connected IEEE1394 device UNKNOWN is displayed If an IEEE1394 device other than one for IEEE1394 audio playback is connected Not Play is displayed and the input Source cannot be assigned Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the IEEE1394 Auto Function Tuner Presets e Set whether or not to automatically play the IEEE1394 device when it is selected with the FUNCTION knob Press the CURSOR or V button to select IEEE1394 Auto Func at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the IEEE1394 Auto
213. first time turn down the master volume to a low level start playing the DTS disc then check whether the DTS indicator on the AVR 4806CI ES page 54 lights before turning up the master volume A DVD player with DTS compatible digital output is required to play DTS DVDs A DTS Digital Output logo is featured on the front panel of compatible DVD players Recent DENON DVD player models feature DTS compatible digital output consult the player s operating instructions for information on configuring the digital output for DTS playback of DTS encoded DVDs MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE FROM DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC U S 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 AND OTHER U S AND WORLD WIDE PATENTS ISSUED AND PENDING DTS DTS ES Neo 6 AND DTS 96 24 ARE TRADEMARKS OF DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC 1996 2003 DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED PAT NO S 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 Media DTS Digital output Playback method terminals reference page Set the input mode to Optical or coaxia AUTO or DTS CD digital output LES page 47 same as for PCM Never set the mode X2 to ANALOG or PCM X1 Optical or coaxial set the input mode to ovo wl ES x3 IP page 47 149 Additional Information 3 DTS ES DTS ES is a new multi channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems Inc While offering high compatibility with the co
214. for adjusting the main volume each time the input Source is switched 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select nput Function Lev at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Input Function Lev screen 3 Audio Input Setup 3 3 Input Function Lev Digital In Assign 1 2 EXT IN Setup Guer E 055 0dB EF3 Input Function Lev Phono 0dB Mol 0dB 4 Function Rename CD OdB vcral 0dB 5 IEEE1394 Assign Tape OdB vea 0dB 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func DVD 0dB VA 0dB 7 Tuner Presets VDP OdB Aux 0dB Exit TV 0dB Default Yesi4 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR or gt button to adjust the level Xx The level can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in units of 1 dB Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears e After completing this setting check that the playback levels for the different sources are the same 101 e The names of the input sources displayed on the front display and on the on screen display can be changed The names or brands of the devices connected to the input sources can be input Press the CURSOR A or V button
215. funk 40850 Elin 40770 Ellion 40850 Elta 40672 Emerson 40591 Encore 40698 Enterprise 40591 Enzer 40770 EuroLine 41115 Fenner 40651 Ferguson 40651 Finlux 40591 Fintec 40784 Firstline 40651 Fisher 40670 Funai 40675 Gateway 41073 GE 40522 General Electric 40717 Global Solutions 40768 Go Video 40715 41044 41730 Go Vision 41071 GoldStar 40591 40778 41107 41165 41353 41359 41407 40768 41730 40690 41056 40831 41270 41730 40713 41085 40831 40784 40690 40675 40784 40769 40672 41169 40713 40695 41077 40717 40741 41075 41072 40741 40790 41100 40730 40783 40790 40831 41003 41127 40770 40850 41051 41115 40705 40816 40821 41268 40869 41334 41158 40815 40744 40783 40833 40869 41099 41144 41158 41304 40741 40770 40783 41165 2 Goodmans GPX Gradiente Gran Prix Grandin Greenhill Grundig Grunkel GVG H amp B H amp B Hanseatic Harman Kardon HDT Hen Hher Hitachi Hiteker Home Electronics Home Tech Humax Hyundai Lo iLo nitial ntegra RT SP Jaton JBL Jeken Jensen Jepssen JMB JNC JSI JVC jwin archer awasak Kendo ennex Kenwood iiro KLH LH Digital Konka OSS PRESET CODE 40651 40833 40699 40651 40831 40672 40717 40539 40790 40770 41169 40850 40713 40741 40582 40705 40713 4065
216. g it to OFF e When the surround back speaker setting is set to 1spkr for Speaker Configuration IS page 125 126 this is set to SB 64 Fader function e This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front channels FL C and FR or the rear channels SL SR SBL and SBR together Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi channel music sources are played Press the ENTER button e Display the Channel Vol screen Press the CURSOR A V or ENTER button then select Fader Channel Vol 0 0B SR 0 OB 0 0B SBR 0 0B 0 0B SBL 0 0B SW 0 OdB SL 0 00 FRONT 4 PREAR X The channel switches in the order shown below each time the ENTER button is pressed E FR I 1SW EL gt gt gt gt SR x x SBLF4SBR EADERL S Press the CURSOR lt button to reduce the volume of the front channels the CURSOR gt button to reduce the volume of the rear channels Example When FRONT is selected Channel Vol 0 548 0 5dB 0 58 0 0dB SR SBR SBL SL aie M4 REAR x The fader function does not affect the subwoofer channel P e The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to 12 dB using the fader function e f the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjust
217. g movies and using regular single way or 2 way speakers for the surround speakers Front speakers Center speaker Surround back speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Surround back speaker Point slightly Front speaker 2 downwards Pd 60t090cm 7 As seen from the side e Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers Consult the operating instructions for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room If the surround speakers are direct radiating monopolar then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90 centimeters 2 to 3 feet above ear level at the prime listening position 145 Additional Information e When using two surround back speakers set them at the back facing front and with both speakers at the same distance from the listening point When using one surround back speaker place it at the rear center facing the front at a slightly higher position 0 to 20 cm than the surround speakers We recommend installing the surround back speaker s at a slightly downward facing angle This effectively prevents the surround back channel signals from reflecting off the monitor or screen at the front center resulting
218. gn IGS page 102 Setting the Component In Assignment e This setting assigns the component video input terminal of the AVR 4806CI for the different input sources 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Component In Assign at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Component In Assign screen 4 Video Setup gt 1 HDMI DVI n Assign 4 2 Component In Assign 2 Component In Assign DvD de VoRa NONE 3 Video Convert Mode pp 2 RCA VAx NONE 4 HDMI Out Setup W 3 RCA 5 Audio Delay DBS NONE 6 On Screen Display VOR NONE veR2 NONE Exit Default Yes 4 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR or gt button to select the component video input terminal X Select from among 1 RCA to 3 RCA If the same component video input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to NONE Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Video Convert Mode e Set whether or not to use the video conversion function 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Video Convert Mode at the Video Se
219. gnal is 480i 576i e When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF e When the video conversion function has been used information such as that of text broadcasts which has been added to the video signal might not be output If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF 107 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the HDMI Out Setup e Set whether to use the analog video signals to HDMI conversion function When using this conversion function set the color format and video range of the signals output from the HDMI terminal 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select HDMI Out Setup at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the HDMI Out Setup screen 4 Video Setup E 4 4 HDMI Out Setup HDMI DVI In Assign Je 2 Component In Assig 3 Video Convert Mode ai YA vert Dr 4 HDMI Out Setup 5 6 Audio Delay LL gt On Screen Display PH Aspect 7 Resolution 4480p 576p Exit p 2 Press the CURSOR or V button to select the setting then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter Analog to HDMI Convert e ON Setting for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals e OFF Setting for not converting analog video signals into HDMI
220. hannel select LFE Main Setting the Delay Time nput the distance between the listening position and the different speakers to set the delay time for the surround mode Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right Speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm Preparations Measure the distances between the listening position and the speakers L1 to L11 on the diagram at the below FL c FR arg Qed X dU L3 12 KS d LZ position SLA Lia SRA EK SBL SBR Advanced Setup Part 2 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Delay Time at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Delay Time screen 2 Speaker Setup 2 3 Delay Time 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Setup 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level Moos d Frequenc Dor Vo Prefer 7 E Set The Distance To Each Speakers Surround Sp Setup H 5 THX Audio Setup In Meters In Feet E
221. he System Setup Menu when both A and B have been setto Large or Small Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Test Tone Start then press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes 2 4 Channel Level Test Tone A4 Manual AB A Surr Sp GTest Tone Start Level Clear Yesj4 When Auto mode is selected Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume e The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order at 4 seconds intervals the first time and second time around 2 seconds intervals the third time around and on AL kal e ER E SIS 2spkrs SW SL FH SBL SBR Xx When the surround back speaker setting is set to Ispkr for Speaker Configuration this is set to SE Advanced Setup Part 2 Example When the volume is set to 11 5 dB while the test tone is being produced from the Front L ch speaker X The volume can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in units of 0 5 dB When Manual mode is selected Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 2 speaker then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume Example Manual mode is selected Press the ENTER button to enter the set
222. he Windows Update installer installing Windows Media vTuner This is an Internet radio free online contents server Note that usage fess are included in upgrade costs For inquiries about this service visit the vTuner site below vTuner website http www radiodenon com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary A copyright protected technology developed by Microsoft The PlaysForSure logo Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device WM DRM to protect the integrity of their content Secure Content so that their intellectual property including copyright in such content is not misappropriated This device uses WM DRM software to play Secure Content WM DRM Software If the security of the WM DRM Software in this device has been compromised owners of Secure Content Secure Content Owners way request that Microsoft revoke the WM DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy display and or play Secure Content Revocation does not alter the WM D
223. he AVR 4806CI the signals further undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround EX System Even without the proper environment for playing the SB channel Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 10096 compatible with existing 5 1 channel playback systems so they can be played as such In this case the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal from both the SL and SR channels so none of the signal components are missing The effects specific to THX Surround EX the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the sound however are the same as with conventional 5 1 channel surround systems Additional Information Audyssey MultEO XT THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Used with permission There are several factors that can degrade the sound from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room One of the most important is the interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as walls the floor and the ceiling in the room Even with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical treatments there are significant problems that are caused by room acoustics These include reflections from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are created between large parallel surfaces in the room In a home theater the situation is further complicated because there
224. he ENTER or CURSOR P button The initial screen when not connected to the Internet is displayed Internet Radio not available Update Press Enter Connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The update screen appears Manual Update EStart Update Basic Operation ENTER 19 CURSOR ES AUX Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button once again e The latest list of radio stations is downloaded from the vTuner site Several minutes are required for this download Press the CURSOR or V button to select the desired setting item then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button Internet Radio Genres Countries New Stations Popular Stations Help 1 5 Finally the list of Internet radio stations is displayed and those that can be played are indicated by the 3x mark in front of them Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired radio station then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e Connection starts and the station starts playing once the buffer reaches 10096 During playback press the ENTER button once to pause playback then press ENTER button again to resume playback x f the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than two seconds when in the play or pause mode playback stops and the previous menu window reappears Basic Operation ENTER CURSOR P There are many Internet radio
225. he operating instructions for other components for further information e The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 1 and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 can be used simultaneously e Audio signals are only output from the HDMI monitor out connector when audio signals are input to the HDMI input connector e When connecting the AVR 4806CI and DVD player using an HDMI cable also connect the AVR 4806CI and monitor or TV using an HDMI cable IGS page 35 18 Easy Setup and Operation Auto Setup Room EO The Auto Setup and Room EO function of this unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting The AVR 4806C s Audyssey MultEQ XT function has the feature that it provides the optimum listening environment at all listening positions in the home theater where there are often multiple listeners viewing programs together To achieve this it is first necessary to use a microphone to measure test tones generated from the different speakers at the various listening positions All this measured data is analyzed with a unique method to comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics in the listening area For optimum effectiveness measurements should be performed at six or more points Move the microphone successively within the listening area surrounded by the speakers as shown on the diagram below to measure the test tones When listening to music or viewing mo
226. ic files in WMA MP3 and WAV format stored on computers music servers connected to the AVR 4806CI via the network The computer s server program must be launched before using this function For details refer to the server program s operating instructions Either turn the FUNCTION knob or press the AUX button to select NetAudio AMP mode The Network Audio menu screen appears FUNCTION SN Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Network Audio GFavorites Internet Radio The host names of the computer s server s on the network are displayed music Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the host name of the computer music server on which the music file you want to play is located then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the search item or the desired folder then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button x Playable music files are indicated by the x mark in front of them Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the music file then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e Connection starts and playback starts once the buffer reaches 100 x Press the CURSOR V button to select the next file the CURSOR A button to select the previous file x During playback press the ENTER button once to pause playback then press the ENTER button again to resume playback x If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more
227. ic software is played it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 10 dB for correct DTS playback TONE This adjusts the tone control 1257 page 63 64 This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode 55 Basic Operation L Dialogue Normalization Dialogue Normalization Dial Norm is a feature of Dolby Digital which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read Dial Norm X dB X being a numeric value The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels you may wish to adjust the volume For example if you see the following message Dial Norm 4 dB in the front panel display to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness just turn down the volume control by 4 dB However unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment Display Night mode When listening at night or at lower volumes the night mode improves listenability Press the NIGHT button on the remote control unit to enter the night mode
228. in interference and making the sense of movement from the front to the back less sharp Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 4806CI and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting ES page 138 2 Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types or dipolar THX types provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker monopolar Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position mounted above ear level Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position Surround speakers Surround back speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Surround back speaker Point slightly downwards As seen from the side Additional Information e Set the front speakers center speaker and subwoofer in the same positions as in example e t is best to place the surround speakers directly at the side or slightly to the front of the viewing position and 60 to 90 cm above the ears e Same as surround back speaker installation method D Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 4806CI and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting 1237 page 138 The sig
229. ing the fader the fader adjustment values are cleared so adjust the fader again 65 Basic Operation Listening to the Radio e Check that the remote control unit is set to AMP or TUNER Auto tuning Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION A SE Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER NA mode Remote control unit Watching the display press the BAND button to select the desired band AM FM or XM X When listening to the XM satellite Radio 127 page AL Press the MODE button to set the auto tuning mode e The AUTO indicator lights Press the TUNING button e Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in P e f tuning does not stop at the desired station use to the Manual tuning operation e When in the auto tuning mode on the FM band the STEREO indicator lights on the display when a stereo broadcast is tuned in At open frequencies the noise is muted and the TUNED and STEREO indicators turn off Basic Operation FUNCTION TU MEMORY BLOCK ZES runme BAND T MEMORY MODE RDS SEARCH S ON SCREEN TUNING CHANNEL d PRESET oe TUNER NUMBER 5 SHIFT Manual tuning Preset memory Use the Auto tuning or Manual tuning operation to tune in the station to be preset in the m
230. ion e The RC 1036 remote control has a backlit EL display whose contents change according to the mode or function selected with the appropriate remote commands for that mode or function L Operate the this unit The AMP button is the main mode for controlling the AVR 4806CI in the main room MAIN ZONE X SURROUND MODE buttons can not be used with the AVR 4806CI L ZONE3 mode To operate the ZONES function The function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP button is pressed gt AMP ZONE 2 ZONE 3 SYSTEM CALL lt ZONE 4 This mode can not be used with the AVR 4806CI Xx The EL display switches as shown below with respect to the selected mode L SYSTEM CALL mode To operate the System call function L AMP mode To operate the MAIN ZONE function P e This function provides the ability to program a series of individual remote control codes into a macro stored under one of the number pad s numeric choices iz page 80 85 musi DIST SPKR TEST 43 Basic Operation INPUT HOME THX FUNCTION MODE CINEMA VOLUME cas INPUT MODE ROOM EA HOME THX CINEMA p oo Ki SOURCE PHONES EXTIN ROOM EQ Hr E voLume FUNCTION P
231. ion Setup EF2 Dolby Digital Setu 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Compression ON 4 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON if you want to use the Compression OFF if you do not want to use it ON The dynamic range is compressed automatically according to the combination of speakers being used OFF The dynamic range is not compressed Xx Set Compression to ON if it seems that sound is distorted because the input level exceeds the allowable input for the front speakers X When a center speaker or surround speakers are not connected the sounds in those channels are directed to the front speakers Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Advanced Playback menu reappears e The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals shown below is stored in the memory and the signal is automatically played with that surround mode the next time it is input Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for the different input sources D Analog and PCM 2 channel signals STEREO 2 2 channel signals of Dolby Digital DTS or other multi channel format DOLBY PLIIx cinema Multi channel signals of Dolby Digital DTS or other multi channel format DOLBY DTS SURROUND PCM and DSD multi channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS MULTI CH IN Default settings are indicated in x During
232. is very hot Improve the ventilation condition around the unit and switch the power back on If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems with the wiring or the ventilation around the unit switch off the power and contact a DENON service center Note on speaker impedance The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance lower than the specified impedance for example speakers with an impedance of lower than 4 Q ohms are connected If the protector circuit is activated the speaker output is cut off Turn off the set s power wait for the set to cool down improve the ventilation around the set then turn the power back on Easy Setup and Operation L Connections e The AVR 4806CI can be configured for 10 speaker playback using two pairs of surround speakers A B and one pair of surround back speakers as shown below e The output of each power amplifier can be assigned to any desired channel to best suit the application For details refer to Setting the Channel Setup and Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment 1257 page 116 117 e When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the other components Front Center Front right speaker speaker Subwoofer left speaker Connection terminal
233. it Example 7CH STEREO mode 7CH STEREO EN Main unit Remote control unit x The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP SIMULATION button is pressed WIDE la SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA MATRIX JAZZ CLUB VIDEO GAME MONO MOVIE CLASSIC CONCERT Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e Display the surround parameter menu ROCK ARENA medium EFFECT410 d E E D TONE 4 98 SB CH OUT an u vor Default Yesd_ x The screen for the selected surround mode appears 62 DSP SIMULATION Lich STEREO ENTER ens fs e CURSOR SURROUND O S PARAMETER Press the CURSOR or V button to select the various surround parameters Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameters setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting e The 7CH STEREO display changes as shown below according to the surround back speaker setting SURROUND BACK SPEAKER DISPLAY ON 7CH STEREO OFF 5CH STEREO e When Default Yes is selected and the CURSOR lt button is pressed CINEMA EQ and D COMP are automatically turned off ROOM SIZE is set to medium EFFECT LEVEL to 10 DELAY TIME to 30 ms and LFE to 0dB e The ROOM SIZE expresses the expansion effect for the different surround modes
234. it is equipped with a last function memory which stores the input and output setting conditions as they were immediately before the power is switched off This function eliminates the need to perform complicated resetting when the power is switched on The unit is also equipped with a back up memory This function provides approximately one week of memory storage from when the main unit s power switch is off and with the power supply cord disconnected 96 Initialization of the Microprocessor e n very rare instances the AVR 4806CI internal microprocessor might lock up or otherwise cause mis operation This might be caused due to an AC line surge or line spike noise or by static electric discharge on or nearby the unit or to connected components If the condition cannot be corrected by powering off the unit including disconnection of the power supply cord for a period of ten minutes and subsequent re connection then the unit may have to be re initialized Doing so will restore the microprocessor to its original out of the box state with all custom memories and settings erased and the original factory default settings restored Only use this procedure if you are sure that the microprocessor requires re initialization Switch off the unit using the main unit s POWER switch Hold the following PURE DIRECT button and DIRECT STEREO button and turn the main unit s POWER switch on Check that the entire
235. ith adjacent terminals with other speaker cable conductors or with the rear panel and screws L Speaker Impedance e Speakers with an impedance of from 6 to 16 Q ohms can be connected for use as front center surround and surround back speakers Be careful when using two pairs of surround speakers A B at the same time since use of speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Q ohms will lead to damage Connecting the speaker cables 1 Loosen by turning counterclockwise 2 Insert the cable 3 Tighten by turning clockwise Connecting banana plugs Turn clockwise to tighten then insert the banana plug SS SS Ow 15 Protector circuit This unit is equipped with a high speed protection circuit The purpose of this circuit is to protect the speakers under circumstances such as when the output of the power amplifier is inadvertently short circuited and a large current flows when the temperature surrounding the unit becomes unusually high or when the unit is used at high output over a long period which results in an extreme temperature rise When the protection circuit is activated the speaker output is cut off and the power supply indicator flashes Should this occur please follow these steps be sure to switch off the power of this unit check whether there are any faults with the wiring of the speaker cables or input cables and wait for the unit to cool down if it
236. jian Sansei Sansui Santon 10163 10037 10185 10037 10264 10009 10668 10087 10036 10009 10587 10163 10418 10335 10017 10817 10087 10361 10714 10238 10455 10009 10009 10374 10037 10163 10455 10163 10361 10606 10335 10102 10009 10092 10700 10009 10056 10154 10208 10370 10682 10814 10039 10216 10264 10451 10037 10587 10727 10009 10206 10072 10216 10418 10037 10714 10037 10698 10825 10412 10030 10109 10498 10610 10817 10011 10516 10668 10194 10363 10621 10516 10030 10093 10721 10019 10060 10156 10216 10482 10702 10817 10217 10412 10264 10602 10729 10698 10773 11037 10497 10603 10544 10556 10712 11037 10631 1755 10072 10163 10217 10556 10718 10821 11060 10371 10412 10655 10698 10861 11537 10259 10264 10087 10264 10218 10264 10216 10217 10712 10748 10163 10250 10516 10548 10177 10217 10208 10290 10473 10480 10032 10036 0154 10171 10030 10032 10090 10178 10226 10587 10766 10363 10370 10411 10428 10282 10264 10817 10287 10560 10235 10356 10516 10039 10178 10037 10455 10463 10706 10714 10418 10556 10335 10625 10264 10359 10548 10052 10650 10039 10092
237. k uses low voltage differential signaling LVDS transfer capabilities of greater than 1 2 Gbps at a differential voltage of approximately 0 3 Vpp are possible 154 Additional Information About IEEE1394 About HDMI IEEE1394 is an international standard established by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States The AVR 4806CI can be connected to an IEEE1394 compatible device using an IEEE1394 cable to enable digital transfer of multi channel audio sources DVD Audio discs Super Audio CDs etc with a single cable e The AVR 4806C s transfer format is compatible with A amp M protocol In addition to A amp M protocol IEEE1394 transfer formats also include MPEG TS DV etc The AVR 4806CI is compatible with a data transfer speed of up to S400 The IEEE1394 maximum data transfer speeds are defined as approximately 100 200 or 400 Mbps expressed respectively as S100 S200 and S400 When S100 or S200 devices are connected the actually transfer rate may be slower than 400 Mbps depending on the device s specifications As far as possible interconnect devices with the same maximum data transfer rate e The AVR 4806CI is compatible with the DTCP Digital Transmission Content Protection system L Copyright protection system In order to play the sound of DVD Audio discs Super Audio CDs or DVDs aside from freely copiable discs using IEEE1394
238. l Level Crossover Frequency and Room EQ are analyzed automatically The main listening position is measured first so leave the microphone where it is Press the CURSOR A or V button to select OK Start then press the CURSOR lt button Measurements for the first point start 1 1 Auto Setup x Please place microphone Th Auto Setup ot Een Ne lene At main listening position Speaker Detect Check GOK Start Retry 4 Cancel Cancel x The screen shown at the below appears once the measurements for the main listening position are completed 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphone at ear height at 2nd listening position Calculated GOK Next Retry L Cancel 2 Next the measurements for the second point will be taken Place the microphone at the second listening position For instructions on the position in which the microphone should be placed 1257 page 19 23 Easy Setup and Operation Press the CURSOR lt button Measurements for the second point start 1 1 Auto Setup 2nd Position C Cancel4 Perform step 2 3 repeatedly The more measurement points the better the resulting room correction effect We recommend a minimum of 6 measurement points 8 measurement points provides the best room correction effect After measuring at the number of points according to your listening environment press the CURSOR or V button to select
239. l the XM channel ex XM001 is displayed Press the TUNING Y button to select channel 0 XM000 The Radio ID is displayed Radio ID Basic Operation FUNCTION CURSOR STATUS Ex TUNING BAND ani Ve 2 WM Channel selection Category search Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER mode Watching the display press the BAND button to select the XM mode number Channel name Song title Artist name Press the TUNING A or Y button to reach the desired channel The channel changes continuously when you press and hold the TUNING button When the artist name and song title are received they are displayed 72 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button in the XM mode e The current category name is displayed lt L Channel Category Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the category and press the CURSOR A or V button to select the channel within the selected category e LOADING is displayed while receiving the channel or information e UPDATING is displayed while updating encryption code e When the selected channel is not available XM is displayed e Information on the artist name song title category and signal level can be checked using the STA
240. laying the input source x The volume can be adjusted within the range of 80 to 18 dB in steps of 0 5 dB However when the channel level is set 1237 page 64 65 or 128 130 if the volume for any channel is set at 0 5 dB or greater the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB In this case the maximum volume adjustment range is 18 dB FUNCTION Maximum value of channel level Xx Also you may not be able to adjust the volume to the maximum of 18 dB when internal volume O compensation control is activated due to the Main unit Remote control unit combination of the surround mode and parameters x To sdEsk ihe inu sowos when ZONE SELECT downmixing from multi channel audio signals into two ZONE3 REC SELECT or TUNING PRESET is selected anfinin cie press the SOURCE button on the main unit then operate the input function selector 1 Select the input source to be played Example CD a L To choose the surround sound mode 2 Start playback on the selected component Example HOME THX CINEMA x For operating instructions refer to the component s manual Press the HOME THX CINEMA button Adjust the volume O x For more information about the surround modes 127 page 50 53 MASTER VOLUME O Je Main unit Remote control unit B0 D dB Press the ROOM EO button O To select the Room EQ function x For more information about the Room EQ function LES page 48
241. lby Digital or DTS Surround 5 1 ch sources 2 ch sources recorded in Dolby Surround THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX MUSIC MODE THX Games Mode PLIIx C THX IG page 52 e These modes are suited for playing 5 1 channel sources in 7 1 channels Select the desired surround mode for the movie and music sources Sources recorded in stereo Sources recorded in monaural PURE DIRECT 1287 page 50 By suspending all circuits and processes not required analog input music playback can be played with optimum quality DIRECT STEREO Effective for achieving pure playback e f there is no need for tone control or distribution of the low frequencies in function of the speaker configuration select the DIRECT mode to achieve the best sound quality IE page 50 DENON Original Surround Modes IG page 61 63 e Select these for 7 1 channel playback with sources recorded in stereo or monaural The effects are different for each of the surround modes Select the one most suited for the source being used DTS NEO 6 IGS page 58 59 This is a surround mode for playing 6 1 or 7 1 channel stereo sources developed by Digital Theater Systems One of two playing modes MUSIC for music sources or CINEMA for movie sources can be selected according to your preferences DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx 2 IGE page 56 57 Developed by Dolby Laboratories this surround mode pr
242. le the object code or in any other way convert the object code into human readable form The software is licensed solely for use within this product Hardware and required 12 95 monthly service subscription sold separately Other fees and taxes including a one time activation fee may apply Subscription fee is consumer only All fees and programming subject to change Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1 800 XMRADIO Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio com XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved 71 Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID 1 Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION O EA Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER mode Watching the display press the BAND button to select the XM mode Press the STATUS button on the main unit until SIGNAL is displayed e The display changes as shown below according to the receiving condition Display Condition GOOD Signal strength is good MARGINAL Signal strength is marginal WEAK Signal strength is poor NO Loss of the signal Adjust the antenna location until SIGNAL GOOD is displayed Press the STATUS button unti
243. left and right channels pre amp output terminals 6 1 Channel Setup G1 Channel Setup Main Zone 2 Power Amp Assign Mai Surr B Not Used ain Zone E Sonate ESurr B 4 Used N S Back 4 1sp sO VERLE UM S Back 4 2sp gt 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Le Zone 4 Mono gt 6 Digital Out Assign Z 2 t Zone3 4 Mono 7 Setup Memory Lock See 4 ee gt Exit Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Option Setup menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment Surr A The Surround A power amplifier channels can be assigned if Surround B is not activated in the main room MAIN ZONE Front This provides a Bi Amp mode for the two main front speakers replicating the front left and front right amplifier channels outputs Front B The surround A power amplifier channels can be used to provide a second set of stereo outputs that match the front left and right speakers providing a Front B option for stereo sound in another location IE page 111 ZONE2 This mode assigns the Surround A amplifier channels to provide ZONE2 speaker level outputs from the Surround A speaker terminals with the option of monaural or stereo operation depending on the Channel Setup setting ZONE3 This mode assigns the Surround A amplifier channels to provide ZONES speaker level outputs from the Surround A speaker terminals with the option of monaural or stereo operation depending
244. ley Crown Crown Mustang CS Electronics CTC Curtis Mathes CXC Cybertron PRESET CODE 10056 10009 10037 10320 10370 10754 10821 10032 10808 10009 10145 10698 10753 10009 10036 10216 10264 10109 10287 10037 10337 10180 10054 10087 10009 10037 10389 1 0359 10486 10487 10714 10715 10672 10216 10218 10247 10016 10030 10056 10060 10451 10466 10180 10218 10092 10009 10108 10046 10337 10102 10370 10714 10163 10411 10156 11156 10037 10698 10487 10247 10039 10370 1105797 10247 10039 10093 10702 10179 10092 10179 10180 10180 10056 10060 10092 10217 10218 10247 10371 10556 10579 10247 10264 10282 10418 10264 10412 10696 11170 10157 10180 10185 10053 10180 10208 10412 10418 10421 10606 10672 10712 10047 10051 10054 10145 10154 10166 11147 11347 D Vision 10037 D Boss 10037 Daewoo 10003 10039 10178 10451 10661 11661 Dainichi 10216 Dansai 10009 10216 Dansette 10412 Dantax 10606 Datsura 10208 Dawa 10009 Daytek 10037 Dayton 10009 Daytron 10019 Dayu 10374 De Graaf 10208 DES 10418 Decca 10037 Deitron 10037 Dell 11080 Denko 10264 Denon 10145 Denstar 10628 Denver 10037 DER 10193 Desmet 10009 Diamant 10037 Diamond 10009 10698 Dick Smith Electronics 10698 Digatron 10037 Digiline 10105 Digital Life 10780 Digitex 10
245. listic Rebox Red Star Regal RFT Roadstar Roch Romsat Rover S ZWO SAB Saba Sabre Sagem Samsung Sanyo SAT Sat Control Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team Satcom Satec Satelco Satline Satplus Satstation 00520 00573 00710 00455 00628 00392 01567 01535 00520 00571 00834 01367 00369 00115 00200 00869 00285 00613 00143 01392 00052 01214 00369 01251 00200 00713 00136 00421 00369 01207 01251 00115 00885 00455 00820 00853 01243 01377 00493 00321 01300 01143 00421 00713 00605 00713 00369 00628 00157 01083 00639 00723 00873 01173 00566 01404 00628 00668 00710 01012 00299 00607 00742 00396 00882 01113 00392 00566 00855 01291 00853 00628 00713 00520 00607 00690 00692 00710 01012 01114 01253 01307 00863 01017 01108 01109 01206 01244 01276 01292 01293 01343 01442 01458 01570 01609 01219 00351 00501 00675 00501 00520 00613 00692 00607 00834 01232 01100 30 Schaub Lorenz Schcke Schneider Schwaiger SES Sedea Electronique Seemann SEG Seleco Septimo Serino Servi Sat ServiSat Sharp Siemens Silva Skantin Skardin SKR SKT SKY SKY Italia Sky Television Sky XL Sky Skymaster Skymax Skyplus SkySat Skyvision SL SL Marx SM Electroni Smart Sony SR Star Star Choice Star Trak Starlan
246. m accessible after connection to an Internet radio station O vTuner The AVR 4806C s Internet radio station list uses vTuner a radio station database service This database service is edited and prepared for the AVR 4806CI Music server function The AVR 4806CI is equipped with a network audio playback function allowing music files stored on a computer to be played via a LAN Local Area Network The AVR 4806Cl s network audio playback function connects to servers using the following technologies Windows Media Connect The Designed to DLNA Guideline Windows Media DRM 10 for network devices System requirements The preparations described below must be made in order to use the Internet radio and music server functions L Broadband Internet connection A broadband connection to the Internet is necessary in order to use the AVR 4806CI s Internet radio function 73 NOTE You must have a contract with an Internet Service Provider ISP in order to connect to the Internet For instructions on connecting to the Internet contact your ISP or a computer store If you already have a broadband Internet connection there is no need to take out another contract L Modem A modem is a device for exchanging signals over the Internet using a broadband connection Some are integrated into routers For instructions on connecting to the Internet contact your ISP or a computer store
247. memory e The top IR segment blinks once after each button press e f the remote recognizes the manufacturer s code the IR segment blinks twice x You have 10 seconds to press each digit If it takes longer than that the remote times out and you must begin again Advanced Operation NOTE 1 DVD player DVD DVD recorder DVDR system Depending on the model and year of manufacture this buttons function cannot be used for some models even if the your device is listed on the included list of preset codes e Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code Refer to the included list of preset codes to change the number and check it out L The preset codes are as follows upon shipment from the factory and after resetting e TV VCR HITACHI e CD DVD DENON SAT annn RCA DVD preset codes 41470 default 40490 DVD 555 DVD 2910 DVD 800 DVD 755 DVD 3800 DVD 1600 DVD 900 DVD 3910 DVD 2000 2 DVD 910 DVD 5900 DVD 2500 G DVD 955 DVD 5910 DVD 3000 3 DVD 1000 DVD 9000 DVD 3300 3 DVD 1200 DVM 715 Z DVD 1500 DVM 1800 Q DVD 1710 DVM 1805 wi DVD 1910 DVM 1815 DVD 2200 DVM 2815 DVD 2800 DVM 4800 ENO DVD 28001I DVD 2900 SRC ON Power on SRC OFF Power off lt lt gt gt Manual search forward and reverse Operating a component stored in the d Stop Play prese
248. mory then press the ENTER button Switch to the Auto Preset Memory screen 3 7 Auto Preset Memory Auto Tuning amp Preset Station Memory Storing Preset Memory Start Ye 4 Press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes e Search flashes on the screen and searching begins e Completed appears once searching is completed he display automatically switches to the Tuner Presets screen P e f an FM station cannot be preset automatically due to poor reception use the Manual tuning operation ES page 66 to tune in the station then preset it using the manual Preset memory operation ES page 66 103 Advanced Setup Part 1 L Preset Skip L Preset Name When selecting preset channels pressing the CHANNEL t is possible to input station names etc for preset or button it is possible to skip specific preset channels channels Except the XM channel These names are displayed on the front display and on the on screen display 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Preset Skip at the Tuner Presets screen Press the CURSOR A or V button to select then press the ENTER button Preset Name at the Tuner Presets screen Switch to the Preset Skip screen then press the ENTER button e Switch to the Preset Name screen 3 7 Tuner Presets 3 7 Preset Skip 3 7 Tuner Presets
249. mplifier channel can be assigned to either ZONE2 or ZONES if set to Mono at Channel Setup ZONE2 The second zone s mono output is provided by the center speaker s power amplifier ZONE3 The third zone s mono output is provided by the center speaker s power amplifier e No signals are output from the center speaker s power amplifier channel 116 Front B This mode sets the Surround B amplifier channels to drive a second set of stereo outputs that match the front left and right speakers providing a Front B option for stereo sound in another location 1287 page 111 CRM No signals are output from the Surround B speaker terminals S Back If no surround back speakers are used in the main room their amplifier channels can be assigned for other uses or one of the two channels can drive one surround back speaker in the main room while the other channel can drive a monaural speaker in another zone Front This provides a bi amp mode for the two main front speakers replicating the front left and front right amplifier channels outputs Front B Both surround back power amplifier channels can be used to provide a second set of stereo outputs that match the front left and right speakers providing a Front B option for stereo sound in another location 1257 page 111 ZONE2 This mode assigns the Surround Back amplifier channels to provide ZONE2 speaker level outputs from the Surrou
250. nalog input ANALOG exclusive analog audio signal playback mode The signals input to the analog input terminals are decoded and played NOTE e Input mode when playing DTS sources Noise will be output if DTS compatible CDs or LDs are played in the ANALOG or PCM mode When playing DTS compatible sources be sure to connect the source component to the digital input terminals OPTICAL COAXIAL and set the input mode to DTS L Input mode display Depending on the input signal n the AUTO mode AN AUTO DENON LINK IEEE 1394 e n the DIGITAL PCM mode PCM DENON LINK IEEE 1394 n the DIGITAL DTS mode DTS DENON LINK IEEE 1394 n the ANALOG mode ANALOG n the EXT IN mode EXT IN L Input signal display DOLBY DIGITAL OO DIGITAL DIG e DTS Es Depending on the input signal DIG e The DSD indicator lights when the DENON LINK or IEEE1394 have been connected and e PC the DSD signals have been inputted ES page 34 37 Depending on the input signal DSD LPCM o The HDCD indicator lights when digital DIG J HDCD signals are being input with a player that supports HDCD playback Basic Operation ROOM EQ x The DIG indicator lights when digital signals are being input properly If the DIG indicator does not light check whether the Digi
251. nals from the surround channels reflect off the walls as shown on the diagram at the left creating an enveloping and realistic surround sound presentation For multi channel music sources however the use of bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position may not be satisfactory in order to create a coherent 360 degree surround sound field Connect another pair of direct radiating speakers as described in example G and place them at the rear corners of the room facing towards the prime listening position 3 When using different surround speakers for movies and music To achieve more effective surround sound for both movies and music use different sets of surround speakers and different surround modes for the two types of sources Front speakers Center speaker Surround speakers A Surround back speakers N P sd Surround speakers B As seen from above Surround Surround back Speakers A Speaker Ng Point slightly Front speaker 7 downwards 60 to 90 a Surround speakers B As seen from the side 146 e Set the front speakers slightly wider apart than the setup for watching movies only and point them toward the listening position in order assure clear positioning of the sound e Set the center speaker in the same positions as in example D Set surround speakers A for watching movies in the positions described in example D or 2 depending on the types of speakers u
252. nation to overturn Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating and these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface This product should not be placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer s instructions have been adhered to Power Sources This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your product dealer or local power company For products intended to operate from battery power or other sources refer to the operating instructions Grounding or Polarization This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug a plug having one blade wider than the other This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug should still fail to fit contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug AL FIGURE A EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE ANTE
253. nction ENTER TEST TONE SYSTEM SETUP Oe Ge CURSOR ENTER SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR Speaker Setup e f the Auto Setup procedure has already been performed there is no need to make this setting e Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually Setting the type of speakers Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Speaker Config then press the ENTER button e Display the Speaker Config screen e The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted according to the combination of speakers actually being used 2 1 Speaker Config 2 1 Speaker Config 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select mm RER i G Speaker Setup at the System Setup Menu a g E Center Sp E dun d Kind N then press the ENTER button n Bebe so Sm e Display the Speaker Setup menu screen 98 No j Small None AARS Sp Back D an s 2 Speaker Setup lspkr Auto Setup Room EQ 1 E2 Speaker Setup El Speaker Config SES Ze Setup 2 subwoofer Setup Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 5 Advanced Playback 2 eri s el Leve speaker then press the CURSOR lt or gt button 6 Option Setup 5 Crossover Frequency to select the paramet
254. nd Back speaker terminals with the option of monaural or stereo operation depending on the Channel Setup setting ZONE3 This mode assigns the Surround Back amplifier channels to provide ZONES speaker level outputs from the Surround Back speaker terminals with the option of monaural or stereo operation depending on the Channel Setup setting SB Z2 When only one surround back speaker is used in the main room connected to the SBL speaker terminals the surround back right amplifier channel can be used to provide monaural output to a speaker located in ZONE2 SB Z3 When only one surround back speaker is used in the main room connected to the SBL speaker terminals the surround back right amplifier channel can be used to provide monaural output to a speaker located in ZONES e Z2 Z3 When no surround back speakers are used in the main room this mode provides monaural sound to a speaker in ZONE2 connected to the SBL speaker terminals with monaural sound to a speaker in ZONES connected to the SBR speaker terminals e SB Only the Surround Back Left speaker terminals are active Both Surround Back speaker terminals are inactive 6 2 Power Amp Assign Front Front Center Center Surr A Surr A Surr B Surr B ES Back ZONE2 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Option Setup menu reappears P e The SB Z2 SB Z3 and SB modes c
255. ndal o 20 Insteninarovenlhieadphonce m E E 21 Combining the currently playing sound with the desired Sant ROL ATOR SC p 21 ue EE 46 Extra Setup SWiehinonnersunroundispeakers 46 preliminary measte menea 22 23 Checking the currently playing program source etc 46 Shea coMsyStenmimeaSlich cl aren 23 Input mode 47 48 T lee Err E e nes RR 24 toon OUT GOD re te TER ES T EE 48 E TE EE 25 Surround Playing a DVD with surround sound 25 Playing modes for different sources 49 Playing audio sources CDs and DVDs Connecting Other Sources 2 channelipla bacsITOdose AAAAAAAAAEAEAEAEAEAEBEBEAEA 50 THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema mode Ec sedi ee T aere gt STE Ces ia Daley EORUM e video conversion function DEE EE EE 51 52 On screen display for component video outputs and Sealey inire THK Sumo EX Momo TEX Cinama HDMI output s EE GE 27 Suneunel mede far sewrezs reeaided in Dalby Disil Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals or DTS 52 54 To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals mS Dolby Disil mode and DTS Sorel EE Connectinga TV tuner ce err only with digital input ww 54 55 Connecting a DBS tuner ade Connecting the external inputs EXT IN terminals 30 Daly Bro Lezie li Fro Lacie 1 mede 56 57 Connecting a video camera or video game e Gg ET Mrz uode dc 58 59 Connecting a DVD recordara 31 SE Connecting a VCR 32 ED INN e a E 59 EE a
256. ne pressing the CURSOR lt or gt button Meter Feet s 3 4 Function Rename B 4DVD 5910 Press the CURSOR lt button to select Default Default 98 Advanced Setup Part 1 Audio Input Setup e Make the audio related settings Setting the Digital In Assignment e This setting assigns the digital input terminals of the AVR 4806CI for the different input sources 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audio Input Setup at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Audio Input Setup menu screen System Setup Menu 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 3 Audio Input Setup 2 Speaker Setup e 3 Audio Input Setup e E 4 Video Setup 3 Input Function Lev 5 Advanced Playback 4 Function Rename qur e eid 5 IEEE1394 Assign Ne 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func xit 7 Tuner Presets Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Digital In Assign then press the ENTER button e Display the Digital In Assign screen In Assign Tape OPT4 V Aux OPT 5 Digital CD 4 AV DVD COAX2 VDP COAX3 OPTI DBS OFF WU OPT2 VCR 2 OPT3 ver 3 OFF Default 99 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or
257. necting Other Sources Connecting the pre out terminals Use these terminals if you wish to connect external power amplifier s to increase the power of the front center surround and surround back sound channels or for connection to powered loudspeakers When using only one surround back speaker connect it to left channel Power amplifier n A gt aaa E CENTER D SURROUND BACK DAA o R D SURROUND CO L ER er R DH LD cores n FRONT omamme 6 R Connecting the power supply cord ACIN AG 120V em Power supply cord Supplied AC outlets wall AC 120V 60Hz 0 cuore AC OUTLETS EN e SWITCHED total capacity 120 W 1 AN laa The power to these outlets is turned on and off in conjunction with the POWER switch on the main unit and when the power is switched between on and standby from the remote control unit No power is supplied from these outlets when this unit s power is at standby Never connect equipment whose total capacity is above 120 W 1 A NOTE e Only use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment Never use them for hair driers TVs or other electrical appliances Insert the plugs securely Incomplete connections will result in the generation of noise 42 Basic Operation Playback F rol uni L ZONE2 mode EES To operate the ZONE2 funct
258. nel s that are set to LARGE low frequencies in that channel s corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer s are from the program source LFE channel and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL THX recommends this mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the room LFE Main Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer s Depending upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listening room Press the ENTER button to enter the setting The Speaker Setup menu reappears 126 L Assignment of low frequency signal range The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals and the low frequency signal range of channels set to Small in the setup menu The low frequency signal range of channels set to Large are produced from those channels L Subwoofer Setup The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and Yes is set for the subwoofer in the Speaker Configuration settings ES page 125 126 e When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including LFE signals if LFE THX is selected the low frequency component is not output from the subwoofer To output the subwoofer c
259. ness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater Additional Information L THX Ultra2 Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier performance pre amplifier performance and operation as well as hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect to previous THX Ultra standards three surround modes have been added the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode L THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode new THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the op
260. ng from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5 1 channel systems D Say Sotto oo D E 2 2 22 0 Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Change of positioning and acoustic image with THX Surround EX system Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL Speaker s for one or two channels are required in order to achieve a THX Surround EX system with the AVR 4806C Adding these however allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only with sources recorded in THX Surround EX but also with conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 7 1 channels using surround back speakers for sources recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and DTS Surround 5 1 channel sources Furthermore all the Denon original surround modes IGS page 61 63 are compatible with 7 1 channel playback so you can enjoy 7 1 channel sound with any signal source L Numbers and types of surround back speakers With THX Surround EX the surround back channel consists of one channel of playback signals but we recommend using two speakers The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX EST page 152 are most effective when using two monopole type surround back speakers placed close together Using two speakers results in a sm
261. nput Function TunER d Surround mode selection screen Surround Mode Sberen d Home THX Cinema r Wide Screen Sup r Stach Roch Arana Jazz Glub Gloss Goncers Mono Mowe E Video Gane PA Matrix Volume control screen Wobane An mn a ab AE E n a Ed iB ba pee be EE BEE BEE Rd a vos ON P Leer 0d8 Stan que DA NOTE To use this function set Power Saving at Network Option under Network Setup to OFF IGS page 124 Advanced Operation Remote control unit ees MODE SELECTOR iR TE mmm _ HOME Operating DENON audio components 7 Press the MODE SELECTOR buttons to select the component you want to operate e The icon for the selected mode flashes AMP 20 DVD oo VCR TV AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL TUNER DIGITAL TUNER SATELLITE or CABLE CD or CDR DVD or DVDR VCR or TAPE TV This function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP button is pressed Example Select AMP mode Select ZONE2 mode Select ZONE3 mode Select SYSTEM CALL mode 80 2 Operate the audio component For details refer to the component s operating instructions x t may not be possible to operate
262. nput selector to the terminals to which video signals are connected e The PURE DIRECT mode is set e Set a surround mode other than the PURE 50 DIRECT mode e DVD player s audio output setting is not set to e Make the DVD player s initial settings bit stream Re Die ROURGHIS UTOR Gh DVD player is not DTS compatible Use a DTS compatible player e AVR 4806CI s input setting is set to analog e Set to AUTO or DTS 47 Ultra2 Cinema THX Music e Surround back speaker set to 1 Connect two surround back speakers 16 125 Mode THX Games Mode 126 133 cannot be set Copying between a source such as DVD and a Copying is not possible Copying from DVD to VCR is not VCR is not usually possible as DVDs are often possible encoded with copy protection signals that prevent VCR recording e Subwoofer s power is not on Turn on the power e e Subwoofer s initial setting is set to NO e Set the setting to YES 125 126 No sound is produced from d s bw of r e Subwoofer s output is not connected e Connect properly 16 42 E e The subwoofer s channel volume level is set e Turn the subwoofer s channel volume level up 64 to OFF EE EE EE e Surround mode is set to a mode other than Set to STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround P f STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround No sound is produced from e Surround mode is set to STEREO e Set to a mode other than STEREO surround speakers e Batteries d
263. nventional DTS Digital Surround format DTS ES greatly improves the 360 degree surround impression and space expression thanks to further expanded surround signals This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since 1999 In addition to the 5 1 surround channels FL FR C SL SR and LFE DTS ES also offers the SB Surround Back sometimes also referred to as Surround center channel for surround playback with a total of 6 1 channels DTS ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal recording methods as described below DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 is the newest recording format With it all 6 1 channels including the SB channel are recorded independently using a digital discrete system The main feature of this format is that because the SL SR and SB channels are fully independent the sound can be designed with total freedom and it is possible to achieve a sense that the acoustic images are moving about freely among the background sounds surrounding the listener from 360 degrees Though maximum performance is achieved when sound tracks recorded with this system are played using a DTS ES decoder when played with a conventional DTS decoder the SB channel signals are automatically down mixed to the SL and SR channels so none of the signal components are lost DTS ES Matrix 6 1 With this format the additional SB channel signals undergo matrix encoding and are input to the SL
264. o room remote control unit DENON RC 616 617 or 618 is wired and connected between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 ZONES the remote controllable devices in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 ZONE3 using the remote control unit X To control playback devices other than the ones above either use that device s remote control unit or preset a separately sold programmable remote control unit e For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices refer to the devices operating instructions Multi zone playback using the ZONE2 and ZONE3 PREOUT terminals L When using the power amplifier as the MAIN ZONE output e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with pre out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals composite and S Video as the ZONE2 ZONE3 output terminals e When using just one speaker in ZONE2 ZONE3 select Mono at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu I page 115 The sound in ZONE2 ZONES is monaural In this case the ZONE2 ZONE3 monaural output is output from both the left and right channels of the ZONE2 ZONE3 PREOUT terminals so connect to either one System configuration and connections example Using external amplifier MAIN ZONE 7 1 channel system ZONE 2 GN ZONE3 VIDEO OUT Monitor Monitor Bre EE E ZONE2 MN lt annuus z VIDEO OUT FR m lt gt E Power Power H Amplifer Amplifer H SW a T
265. ods Marks indicating Dolby Digital compatibility Doss The following are general examples Also refer to the player s operating instructions DIGITAL Media Dolby Digital output terminals Playback method reference page DVD EN Optical or coaxial digital output same as for PCM EN Set the input mode to AUTO IE page 47 Others satellite broadcasts CATV etc Optical or coaxial digital output same as for PCM Set the input mode to AUTO IGE page 47 1 O Some DVD digital outputs have the function of switching the Dolby Digital signal output method between bit stream and convert to PCM When playing in Dolby Digital surround on the AVR 4806CI switch the DVD player s output mode to bit stream In some cases players are equipped with both bit stream PCM and PCM only digital outputs In this case connect the bit stream PCM terminals to the AVR 4806CI Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic Il is a new multi channel playback format developed by Dolby Laboratories using feedback logic steering technology and offering improvements over conventional Dolby Pro Logic circuits Dolby Pro Logic II can be used to decode not only sources recorded in Dolby Surround X but also regular stereo sources into five channels front left front right center surround left and surround right to achieve surround sound Wher
266. ola Movie Time r Zap Mr Zap S Multichoice ultitech MultiVision yrio NEC okia Noos SC NTL Oak Ono Optimus Optus Pace Panasonic Panther PRESET CODE 00019 00451 00276 01376 00063 01112 01112 00015 00019 00883 00012 01602 01496 01569 00817 00063 00003 00007 01068 00021 00276 00008 00000 01488 00637 00797 00011 00014 00015 00276 00476 00797 01110 00144 00020 00034 00259 00273 00014 00153 00315 00011 00012 00014 00015 00276 00810 00144 00443 00476 00810 01106 01187 01254 01483 00443 00250 00277 01060 01068 00019 01060 00237 01060 01068 01368 01877 00008 00021 00040 00107 00443 Paragon 00000 TS 00003 Philips 00013 00153 00317 00619 00817 01305 Tusa 00015 Pioneer 00144 00533 00877 01500 01877 TV86 00063 Popular Mechanics 00400 Unika 00022 00153 Pulsar 00000 United Artists 00007 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix United Cable 00003 00003 Universal 00022 00153 00191 Quasar 00000 US Electronics 00276 Quiero 00817 V2 00883 RadioShack 00015 00315 00797 00883 Videotron 00250 RCA 00021 01256 Videoway 00250 Recoton 00400 Viewmaster 00883 Regal 00020 00259 00273 00279 Viewstar 00063 00258 Regency 00002 Vision 00883 Rembrandt 00011 Visionetics 01064 Runco 00000 Visiopass 00451 Sagem 00817 01089 01112 Vortex View 00883 Salora 00000 Zenith 00000 00008 005
267. on Sonneclair Sonolor Sontec Sonwa Sony Soundwave Ssangyong Stack 9 Starlite Stern SIS Sunkai Sunstar Suntronic Sunwood Supra Sylvania Symphonic Systemax T A Tagar Systems Taisho Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tchibo TCM PRESET CODE 20081 20037 20045 20072 20037 20037 20000 20072 20037 20240 20037 20081 20037 20278 20045 20081 20348 20614 20072 20104 20072 20046 20037 20642 20000 212957 20037 20072 21972 20037 20278 20042 20209 20000 20000 20072 20037 20000 20000 21972 20162 21972 20209 20278 20000 20000 20000 20081 20348 20348 20041 20048 20104 20046 20072 20209 20616 20032 21972 20209 20278 20240 20035 20104 20037 20041 20209 20209 20807 20081 20104 20320 20347 20348 20033 20035 20636 21232 20348 20348 20278 20348 20043 20081 21781 20048 20081 20240 20043 20045 20048 20067 20348 Teac 20000 20037 20041 20072 20278 20642 Wards 20000 20033 20035 20038 20039 20042 Tec 20072 20045 20046 20047 20048 20060 20072 Tech Line 20072 20081 20149 20240 Technics 20035 20081 20162 20226 Watson 20081 20642 TechniSat 20209 Wharfedale 20642 Teco 20035 20037 20038 20041 20048 White Westinghouse 20072 20209 20278 Tedelex 20037 20209 20348 20642 World 20348 Teknika 20000
268. on the Channel Setup setting SE No signals are output from the Surround A speaker terminals Surr B The Surround B amplifier channels can be re assigned if they are not being used in the main room and the Surround A amplifier channels are assigned to either the surround channels or to the front channels e AVR 4806CI s power amplifiers for seven channels except the front channel can be assigned to any channels in the MAIN ZONE ZONE2 or ZONES and output to the speakers In this way power amplifiers not being used in the MAIN ZONE can be assigned for multi zone use the front speakers can be connected with a Bi Amp etc so you can create the desired speaker system x The available power amplifier channels that can be re assigned may differ according to settings previously made in the Channel Setup menu ES page 115 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Power Amp Assign at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Power Amp Assign screen 6 Option Setup 6 2 Power Amp Assign Channel Setup Power Amp Assign Volume Control Trigger Out Zone2 8 Tone Ch Le Digital Out Assign Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the power amplifier to be assigned then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select which channel to assigned the amplifier to Center If no center speaker is connected in the main room the center speaker power a
269. one Ch Le 6 7 E GTrigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 Trigger Out 3 Digital Out Assign Setup Memory Lock Default L Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the trigger out terminal you want to set then press the ENTER button Switch to the setting screen Example When Trigger Out 1 is selected 6 4 Trigger Out 1 D ZONE MAIN Tuner OFF DBS ON Phono OFF VCR 1 ON CD OFF VCR 2 ON Tape OFF VCR 3 ON DVD ON V Aux ON VDP ON Aux ON TV Surr Mode Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the zone MAIN ZONE ZONE2 and ZONE3 The power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and off Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON When that input source is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on OFF When that input source is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off 119 Advanced Setup Part 1 If MAIN was selected at step 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the surround mode then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON If ON is selected when an input source set
270. one surround back speaker was connected The surround back or the surround B speaker was detected but the surround A speaker was not detected x f multiple errors occur press the CURSOR lt or gt button to check the contents e Check that the pertinent speakers are properly connected 1 1 Auto Setup VD GdFront gt Retry Cancela kE Skip4 2 The speaker polarity is connected in reverse x f multiple errors occur press the CURSOR lt or gt button to check the contents e Check the polarity of the pertinent speakers e For some speakers the screen below may be displayed even though the speakers are properly connected If so select Skipt 1 1 Auto Setup ARA Noise is Too High or Level is Too Low Retry4 L Cancel 3 There is too much ambient noise in the room and the measurements cannot be made accurately 4 The sound level that is output from the speakers and or subwoofer is too low e Either turn off the power of the device that generated the noise during the measurements or move the device away e Try again at a time when it is quieter e Check the placement and orientation of the loudspeakers e Adjust the subwoofer s output level 1 1 Auto Setup Caution BM icrophone None or Speaker None Retry4 L Cancel 5 The measurement microphone is not connected or all of speakers have not been de
271. ones S Back x Adjustments made in this section will have an effect on the 2sp various Power Amp Assign setting options CS page 116 11 1 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Option Setup at the System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ 8 Bp FUR SETUP hat Setup Digital Out Assign x Setup Memory Lock xit Press the CURSOR or V button to select Channel Setup then press the ENTER button Display the Channel Setup screen 6 Option Setup 6 1 Channel Setup 115 Select if you have a pair of surround back speakers connected SBL amp SBR 1sp Select if you have one surround back speaker connected to SBL Not Used then press the ENTER button Select if you do not have surround back speakers e Display the Option Setup menu screen Zones E Stereo Select for stereo playback in ZONE2 two channels Select for stereo playback in ZONES two channels Mono Select for monaural playback in ZONES one channel 1 2 Speaker Setup 1 Channel Setup Mono d 3 Audio Input Setup 2 Power Amp Assign Select for monaural playback in ZONE2 one channel die 22 WA 3 Volume Control Zone3 6 0 SE t SE 4 Trigger Out i E GA 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev Stereo E 7 E f Mono is selected for ZONE2 or ZONES monaural single channel sound is output from both of the ZONE2 or ZONES
272. onse S Video terminals Input output level and impedance Frequency response Color component video terminal Input output level and impedance Frequency response 2 5 mV x1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 74 dB A weighting with 5 mV input 150 mV 8V 0 03 1 kHz 3 V 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms C color signal 0 286 Vp p 75 Q ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms Ps Cs signal 0 7 Vp p 75 Q ohms Pr Cr signal 0 7 Vp p 75 Q ohms 5 Hz 100 MHz 0 3 dB 163 O Tuner section Receiving Range Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity S N IHF A Total Harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz O General Power supply Power consumption Maximum external dimensions Mass L Remote control unit RC 1036 Batteries External dimensions Mass FM note pV at 75 Q ohms O dBf 1 x 10715 W 87 5 MHz 107 9 MHz 1 0 uV 11 2 dBf MONO 1 6 uV 15 3 dBf STEREO 23 uV 38 5 dBf MONO 77 dB STEREO 72 dB MONO 0 15 STEREO 0 3 Yo AC 120 V 60 Hz 10 6A 1 W Max Standby Specifications AM 520 kHz 1710 kHz 18 uV 50 dB 434 W x 178 H x 500 D mm 17 3 32 x 7 0 x 19 11 16 23 8 kg 52 Ibs 8 oz LR6 AA Type two batteries 63 W x 238 H x 31 D mm 2 31 64 x 9 3 8 x 1 7 32 190 g Approx 6 7 oz including batteries For purposes of improvemen
273. oother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back channel when listening from a position other than the center L Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the sound at the rear Because of this the surround left and right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back As shown on the diagram above in a movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners creating an acoustic image as if the sound were floating in space To achieve these effects we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than with conventional surround systems Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5 1 channel sources in the THX Surround EX mode Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode 144 Speaker setting examples Here we describe a number of speaker settings for different purposes Use these examples as guides to set up your system according to the type of speakers used and the main usage purpose 1 For THX Surround EX systems using surround back speakers D Basic setting for primarily watching movies This is recommended when mainly playin
274. or when using surround speakers A and B at the same time be sure to adjust the balance of playback levels between each channel for the various selections of A B and A B L Adjusting the test tone using the remote control unit As described below this adjustment can be accomplished via the with remote control unit e Adjusting with the remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the Auto mode and only effective in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND and HOME THX CINEMA modes The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory Press the TEST TONE button Test tones are output from the different speakers Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the channel level so that the volume of the test tones is the same for all the speakers After completing the adjustment press the TEST TONE button again Setting the Crossover Frequency Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency response characteristics of the various front center surround and surround back speaker systems If a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified 3 dB low frequency response rolloff adjust the crossover frequency for that speaker to match the specified low frequency response limit e g 80 Hz When a speaker is set to SMALL low frequencies in that channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to the system s subwoofer s
275. order Basic Operation FUNCTION ENTER CURSOR ent TUNING ME Le eege ENTER eas W CURSOR lt gt gt AUX Updating the list of radio stations Press the MODE button to select the configuration mode then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The settings screen appears ET Internet Radio Radio List Version Automatic Update Manual Update Configuration Finternet Radio Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Automatic Update or Manual Update then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The update screen appears Select Radio List Version to display the current version When Automatic Update is selected Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button to select 241 Yes e The list of radio stations is updated approximately once every other day When Manual Update is selected Press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button SE The list of radio stations is updated this one time P e When Yes is set for Automatic Update set Power Saving in the Network Setup to OFF I page 124 When used with Power Saving set to ON we recommend performing the Manual Update procedure periodically about once a week 78 Playing music files stored on the computer music server e The necessary system connections and settings must be made in order to play music files e This procedure is used to play mus
276. other multi channel sources is possible by connecting the AVR 4806CI to a DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player e With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken however the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player In this case connect the DVD player s analog multi channel output to the AVR 4806CI s EXT IN terminals for playback Also refer to your DVD player s operating instructions Connecting a video camera or video game Video camera Video game HI g T sr AUDIO OUT O L b _ D Sec Ces mg D ej E mn IE d j e S VIDEO On OUT O 30 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a DVD recorder e For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DVD recorder S Video and composite video outputs are also provided If you choose to use the component video connection it needs to be assign For more information about Component Input Assignment ES page 107 e lf you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital sources such as a DVD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck you will needs connect analog inputs and outputs as shown below in addition to the digital audio connections DVD recorder O d 1 S VIDEO E OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PB KI Hr PR
277. ovides 7 1 channel surround sound with conventional stereo 2 channel sources e Select CINEMA mode for movie surround soundtracks MUSIC for music sources and GAME for 2 channel game box audio sources e Though we recommend selecting the surround mode as described above other surround modes can also be selected WIDE SCREEN IGE page 61 63 e Effective for 2 channel sources recorded in Dolby Surround or for 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources HOME THX CINEMA THX 5 1 IKE page 51 e This mode is optimized for playing 5 1 channel movies e For sources recorded in Dolby Surround as well this mode provides the same power as with 5 1 channel sources DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx 2 DTS SURROUND DTS 96 24 DTS PLIIx 2 DTS NEO 6 127 page 54 55 e This mode is optimized for playing 5 1 channel or 7 1 channel music e For Dolby Surround recording sources Dolby Pro Logic II playback is conducted 49 NOTE e Surround modes indicated with an asterisk 1 require the use of two surround back speakers e Surround modes marked with an asterisk 2 cannot be used when the surround back speaker is set to NONE e The PLIIx Cinema mode cannot be selected when only one surround back speaker is being used Basic Operation HOME THX CINEMA SURROUND ENTER PARAMETER PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO CURSOR
278. playback in the PURE DIRECT mode the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Auto Surround Mode at the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button Display the Auto Surround Mode screen 5 Advanced Playback ach Direct Stereo 5 3 Auto Surround Mode Dolby Digital Setu Auto Surround Mode Manual EQ Setup S Press the CURSOR lt or button to select ON if you want to use the auto surround mode OFF if you do not want to use it Press the ENTER button to enter the setting he Advanced Playback menu reappears The various settings applied in the auto surround mode can be checked via the on screen display Simply press the ON SCREEN button 127 page 51 52 Auto Surround Mode CD ANALOG PCM 2ch STEREO Multith MULTI CH IN DIGITAL 2ch DOLBY PLIIx cinema 5 Ich DOLBY DTS SURROUND d 112 Setting the Manual EO Setup e Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers except the subwoofer while listening to a music source 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Manual EQ Setup at the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Manual EQ screen 5 Advanced Playback 5 4 Manual EQ 1 2ch Direct Stereo 2 Dolby Digital Setu
279. played for SYSTEM SETUP SURROUND PAL M and PAL 60 PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons When SECAM signals of video input are up converted the E When OFF is selected for the Analog to HDMI Convert setting no A a video signals other than the HDMI input signal are output signals are output in PAL format from the S Video connector Including the contents of and MI above e When the input signal is set to component video 1080p the signals cannot be output to the HDMI monitor output terminal 161 Additional Information Video convert S VIDEO MONITOR Input signals MONITOR OUT OUT HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO x x x x x x x O x x o x Used x x o o Not used x x 9 O x 9 x x x O x O x o o x Used x O O O Not used x O O O DRE 9 x x x O x x O o x O x Used O x O O Not used 9 x O O O O x x O O x O o o o x Used o O O O Not used O O O O O Signal input x Not output X No signal 1 On screen display superimposed on video signal and output 2 On screen display superimposed on S Video signal and output EZ On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP SURROUND PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons When Analog to HDMI Convert is set to OFF no signals other than the HDMI input signals are output to the HDMI monitor output terminal 162 Specific
280. put of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 OUT terminal on the AVR 4806CI s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 3 IN terminal Connecting a CD player To connect the digital audio output from the CD player you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment 127 page 99 CD player AUDIO OUT D SS o co o ena j OD d qo COAXIAL OUT Connecting Other Sources Connecting a turntable e You can connect the turntable MM cartridge to the PHONO terminals Turntable MM cartridge AUDIO OUT NOTE e The phono input can accept signals from moving magnet MM and high output moving coil MC phono cartridges If your turntable is equipped with a low output MC cartridge you will need to use a separate MC head amplifier or step up MC transformer e f humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected to the SIGNAL GND terminal disconnect the ground wire Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder e f you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital source such as a CD or MD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck you will need to connect analog inputs and outputs as shown below in addition to the digital audio connections CD reco
281. r Amp Assign 3 Volume Control 4 Trigger Out 5 Zone2 3 Tone Ch Lev 6 Digital Out Assign 7 Setup Memory Lock Exit 6 3 Volume Control M 6 3 Volume Control Zone2 Vol Lev 4 VAR gt Vol Limits OFF gt P On Lev LAST Mute Lev 4 FULL Vol Limit4 OFF P On Lev LAS Mute Lev 4 FUL Vol Lev 4 Vol Limita VAR OFF gt LAST gt Zone3 Mute Lev 4 P On Lev UL FULL Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired setting then press the CURSOR or gt button to select the parameter Volume Limit Set the upper limit for the volume for the different zones e 20 dB 10 dB 0 dB The volume cannot be selected levels e OFF If you do not want to set a volume limit select ORE In this case the volume can be set to the AVR 4806Cl s maximum volume output level of 18 dB which is extremely loud increased above the Power On Level Set the volume that is set when the power is turned on for the different zones You can adjust the volume level within the range of 80 to 18 dB in steps of 1 0 dB e Mute The volume is always muted when the power is turned on LAST The volume set when the AVR 4806CI was last used is stored in the memory and set when the power is turned on Mute Level Set the volume attenuation level when the mute mode is set for the different zones e FULL The volume is fully muted e 40 dB The volume is lowe
282. rder MD recorder D AUDIO OUT R AUDIO IN ee s Ia 18 R OO T D o e OPTICAL ji OUT gt OPTICAL Dl S IN NE LL AA NOTE e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 4 OUT terminal on the AVR 4806CI s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 4 IN terminal 33 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a tape deck Tape deck D AUDIO IN O A aj ay R D AUDIO OUT e E eL A R DENON LINK connection High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD player Digital transfer and multi channel playback of DVD Audio discs and other multi channel sources is possible by connecting the AVR 4806CI to a DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure to make a setting to DENON LINK with the System Setup Digital In Assignment 27 page 100 DVD player H Kee e DENON ui a 1 Ve c P e With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken however the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player In this case connect the DVD player s analog multi channel output to the AVR 4806
283. red The tone control function will not work in the PURE DIRECT DIRECT or Home THX Cinema mode L Adjusting the tone Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button Display the surround parameter menu FROOM SIZE medium EFFECT410 ROCK ARENA TONE 4 SB CH OUT ENa vor Default Yes4 X The screen selected surround mode appears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select TONE ROCK ARENA ROOM SIZE 4medium EFFECT410 SB CH OUT 4 vor Default Yes4 Press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Tone Control screen Total Control oM GTone Defeat Press the CURSOR gt button to select Tone Defeat OFF Total Control Bass 4 60 Tone Defeat ON MH conter M He SE Ven Surround er ye ves Te SurroundBack Dor Mee Pind vidual Ch Contro Subwoofer e Ra Basic Operation SURROUND CH SEL ENTER PARAMETER CURSOR TONE DEFEAT Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Bass or Treble Press the CURSOR lt 1 or gt button to set the level OQ To increase the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be increased to up to 6 dB in steps of 1 dB x To decrease the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be decreased up to 6 dB in steps of 1
284. red 40 dB from the current level e 20 dB The volume is lowered 20 dB from the current level Volume Level Set whether to fix the output level for the different zones or make it variable Variable The level can be adjusted freely using buttons on the remote control unit e 40 dB 0 dB The output level is fixed at the set level and the volume can no longer be adjusted Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Option Setup menu reappears For ZONE2 and ZONES the Volume Limit and Power On Level can be set when Variable is selected for Volume Level When the power amplifier is assigned to either of the 118 ZONE2 and ZONE3 channels at Power Amp Assign VAR only variable is displayed and the fixed level cannot be set Setting the Trigger Out e Three 12 V DC Trigger Outputs on the rear panel can be used to control other devices with compatible trigger inputs such as motorized screens motorized screen masking motorized drapes and other trigger controlled devices Set the DC output supplied from the trigger out terminals for the various input sources to ON or OFF 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Trigger Out at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Trigger Out screen Option Setup 6 4 Trigger Out 1 Channel Setup 2 Power Amp Assign 3 Volume Control 4 Trigger Out 5 Zone2 3 T
285. rom the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm With the AVR 4806CI it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the best layout for a variety of Sources and surround modes L Surround speaker selector function This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by switching between two systems of surround speakers A and B The settings of the different speakers A only B only or A B are stored in the memory for the different surround modes so they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected SB Surround Back Speakers Using A only Using B only Multi surround speaker system Single surround speaker system 14 Easy Setup and Operation Speaker connections e Connect the speaker terminals with the speakers making sure that like polarities are matched with O with O Mismatching of polarities will result in weak central sound unclear orientation of the various instruments and the sense of direction of the stereo being impaired NOTE NEVER touch the speaker terminals when the power is on Doing so could result in electric shocks e When making connections take care that none of the individual conductors of the speaker cable come in contact w
286. rossover Freq Check EQ Parameter Check Restore Yesi4 GExit 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 1 Auto Setup Room EQ Auto Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check GExit 137 Advanced Setup Part 2 Advanced Setup Part 2 System setup items and default values set upon shipment from the factory 1 Auto Setup Room EQ Auto Setup Room EQ Default settings Page This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and 1 Auto Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to 19 25 permit an appropriate automatic setting 2 Room EQ Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each All Room EQ OFF 134 Setup surround mode Direct Mode Set the ON OFF setting of Room EQ in the case of the 3 Ve S BPA Kees m OFF 135 Setup surround mode is in Direct or Pure Direct A Mic Input Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or Mic 135 Select V AUX L channel input terminal 2 Speaker Setup Speaker Setup Default settings Page Input the combination of speakers in your system and their Front S Cantar S Subwoof Surround Sp Surround Back S corresponding sizes SMALL for regular speakers
287. round EX In 1999 a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the release of the movie Star Wars Episode Dolby Digital Surround EX is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel sound The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound effects that seem to pass right over the listener s head This system was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories fusing THX s idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform 360 degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories matrix encoding technology Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing system Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and the new surround back SB channel was added to achieve improvements over the conventional 5 1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the rear the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters thereby enabling various types of surround sound The surround back channel signal is a matrix encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital SL surround left and SR surround right channels Upon playback the signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL SR and SB channels and output as 6 1 channels of signals With t
288. rovided If you choose to use the component video connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Component Input Assignment IGS page 107 To connect the digital audio output from the DBS tuner you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the coaxial or the optical connection if needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment I25 page 99 DBS BS Tuner VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT OPTICAL 9 our A cur M y 29 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the external inputs EXT IN terminals e These terminals are for inputting multi channel audio signals from an outboard decoder or a component with a different type of multi channel decoder such as a DVD Audio player or a multi channel Super Audio CD player or other future multi channel sound format decoder e The method of video signal connection is the same as that for DVD player IG page 17 For i i k using th li EXT IN inal 45 For instructions on playback using the external input terminals IZ amp page 45 DVD Audio Video Super Audio CD Player External decoder 7 1ch AUDIO OUT FRONT 10 gt L I CENTER SURROUND EC e R or C R SUB LT WOOFER BANI I e Playback using the DENON LINK connector Digital transfer and multi channel playback of DVD Audio discs and
289. rphy usikland Myryad AD Naiko anbao Nansheng aonis NAT ational NEC Neckermann NEI eovia Nesco etsat NetTV etwork Neufunk ew Tech Newave icam zZz icamagic ikkai zZ ikko Nikon 10216 10516 10009 10700 10037 10055 10019 6 102 10032 1071 10009 10817 10193 10037 10009 10247 10039 10037 10556 10156 10037 10009 10264 10363 10226 10051 10009 10051 10170 10374 10508 10882 10037 10320 10556 10037 10865 10179 10037 MOS 10032 10037 10217 10009 10544 10216 10009 10216 10030 10848 10217 10609 10843 10093 10030 10361 10051 10486 10037 10264 10163 10218 10178 10606 10264 10412 10055 10011 10053 10178 10381 10603 11170 10087 10363 10163 10247 10337 10218 10092 10032 10217 10092 10290 10056 10370 10208 10668 10102 10363 10216 10247 10361 10412 10817 10208 10019 10056 10186 10412 10661 11270 10163 0370 10287 10556 10093 10035 10218 10178 2029 10060 10512 10226 MINOS 10180 10486 10866 10848 11704 10191 210337 10610 MIOS 10036 10264 10226 10030 10154 10217 10455 10704 10200 0411 10292 10370 10163 10185 10264 10412 10216 10217 10556 10508 10
290. rs HERR andiFrequney 0B 113 114 139 Advanced Setup Part 2 6 Option Setup Option Setup Default settings Page 4 Channel The number of channels that you wish to play back in each Main Zone Zone2 Zone3 i5 Setup zone are assigned to each zone accordingly Surr B Used S Back 2sp Stereo Stereo To suit your preference a power amp other than the front Power Am can be assigned to a playback channel and the front Front Center Sur A Sur B S Back 2 Assian P channel bi amp playback or the ZONE2 or ZONE3 116 117 g playback channel can be output from the AVR 4806CI Front Center Surr A Sur B S Back Speakers i i This sets the volume level of each zone output Volume Limit s za This sets the upper limit for the master Main Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL volume Power On Level Volume This sets the volume level upon switching on 3 the power of each zone Zone2 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL 118 Control Mute Level This sets the amount of attenuation of the audio output when each zone is muted Volume Level eg E 8 8 This sets whether the output level of ZONE2 Zone3 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL to 3 is
291. search 20038 10218 10264 10361 10363 10371 10377 Victor 20041 20067 21283 10412 10433 10473 10480 10516 10548 Video Concepts 20045 10556 10581 10602 10606 10631 10648 Video Technic 20000 10672 10696 10698 10702 10706 10714 Videomagic 20037 10715 10729 10745 10753 10812 11537 Videosonic 20240 Akashi 10009 Viewsonic 21972 Akiba 10037 10218 10282 10455 Villain 20000 Akira 10037 10418 10556 Voodoo 21972 10 PRESET CODE Akito Akura Alaron Alba Albatron Albiral Alfide Alkos Allorgan Allstar Ambassador America Action Amplivision Ampro Amstrad Anam Anam National Andersson Anex Anglo Anhua Anitech Ansonic AOC Aolingpu Aolinpike Apex Apex Digital Arcam Archer Ardem Aristona ART ASA Asberg Asora Astra Asuka ATD Atlantic Audinac 10037 10102 10672 10035 10206 10037 10177 10180 10217 10751 10009 10362 10648 10003 10861 10055 11163 10037 10009 10051 10009 10009 10556 10003 10060 10180 10858 10264 10156 10748 10216 10003 10037 10037 11037 10070 10102 10009 10037 10217 10698 10001 10180 0009 10412 10179 0009 10235 10487 10700 0037 10668 10216 0036 10843 10217 10370 10037 10371 11037 10009 10250 10421 10264 10037 10104 10668 10009 10092 10185 10412 10765 10765 10217 10486 10556
292. sed Set surround speakers B for playing multi channel music at the same height as the front speakers and slightly at an angle to the rear of the listening position and point them toward the listening position Connect the surround speakers for watching movies to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 4806CI the surround speakers for playing multi channel music to the surround speaker B terminals Set the surround speaker selection on the setup menu For instructions ES page 131 132 To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music we suggest that during setup choose Dolby Digital DTS with THX and Surround Speakers A the bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position Choose Dolby Digital DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the listening room Then by simply activating the THX function used during movie playback the Surround A speakers are automatically activated For multi channel music listening Dolby Digital or DTS music programs turn off the THX enhancements by touching the THX button on the remote control and the Surround B speakers will be automatically activated Example Movie sources Dolby DTS surround etc THX or THX 5 1 mode Speakers A usic sources DVD video DTS CD etc Dolby DTS surround Speakers B Xx The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning HOME THX
293. sources but also for stereo programs On the AVR 4806CI it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder 2 DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround also called simply DTS is a multi channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems DTS offers the same 5 1 playback channels as Dolby Digital front left front right and center surround left and surround right as well as the stereo 2 channel mode The signals for the different channels are fully independent eliminating the risk of deterioration of sound quality due to interference between signals crosstalk etc DTS features a relatively higher bit rate as compared to Dolby Digital 1234 kbps for CDs and LDs 1536 kbps for DVDs so it operates with a relatively low compression rate Because of this the amount of data is great and when DTS playback is used in movie theaters a separate CD ROM synchronized with the film is played With LDs and DVDs there is of course no need for an extra disc the pictures and sound can be recorded simultaneously on the same disc so the discs can be handled in the same way as discs with other formats There are also music CDs recorded in DTS These CDs include 5 1 channel surround signals compared to two channels on current CDs They do not include picture data but they offer surround playback on CD players that are equipped
294. ss the CURSOR or V button to select the frequency then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the gain level Xx Each frequency can be adjusted the range from 20 dB to 6 dB in 0 5 dB step Front L R DG 634 0 0dB 125H 0 0d 250Hz 0 0dB 500Hz 0 04 TkHz 0 O 2kHz 0 0d bi 4kHz 0 0dB S 8kHz 0 0dB 16kHz 0 0d Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Manual EO screen reappears Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button The Advanced Playback menu reappears 5 4 Manual EQ Default Yes4 Base Curve Copy4 Adjust CH L R CH gt 113 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears L Procedure for copying the Flat correction curve Press the CURSOR A button to select Base Curve Copy then press the CURSOR lt button 5 Advanced Playback 2ch Direct Stereo Dolby Digital Setup Auto Surround Mode Manual EQ Setup 5 4 Manual EQ Default Yesa 5 4 Manual EQ mBase Curve Copy4 Curve Flat Adjust CH 4L R CH gt GBase Curve Copy Yes 4 gt I I e Base Curve Copy is displayed after performing the Auto Setup ce 99 e To restore the settings to their defaults select Default Yes 2 Press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes
295. ssed AUTO On DIS When operating the remote control unit Remote control unit The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit is pressed p AUTO gt ACIMI gt DS EXT IN lt ANALOG 4 AUTO All auto mode In this mode the types of signals being input to the digital and analog input terminals for the selected input source are detected and the program in the AVR 4806Cl s surround decoder is selected automatically upon playback This mode can be selected for all input sources other than PHONO and TUNER The presence or absence of digital signals is detected the signals input to the digital input terminals are identified and decoding and playback are performed automatically in DTS Dolby Digital or PCM 2 channel stereo format If no digital signal is being input the analog input terminals are selected Use this mode to play Dolby Digital signals PCM exclusive PCM signal playback mode Decoding and playback are only performed when PCM signals are being input Note that noise may be generated when using this mode to play signals other than PCM signals DTS exclusive DTS signal playback mode Decoding and playback are only performed when DTS signals are being input 47 Basic Operation L Selecting the analog mode Press the ANALOG button on the main unit or INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit to switch to the a
296. stations on the Internet The programs they broadcast and their bit rates vary widely Generally the higher the bit rate the higher the sound quality but streamed music or sound may be broken if the communication lines or servers are busy Inversely programs with low bit rates have lower sound quality but tend to be more stable Server Full or Connection Down is displayed if the station is congested or if it is not broadcasting If you do not want the OSD to be displayed while playing Network Audio internet radio music server set Function Mode Status at Setting the On Screen Display to OFF 127 page 110 Presetting registering Internet radio stations There are two ways to register stations by presetting them or by storing them in your favorites Stations that are preset can be tuned in directly from the remote control unit Press the MEMORY button while playing the Internet radio station you want to register e The registration menu screen appears Favorites Preset Favorites Preset Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Preset then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e The preset registration screen appears 76 r MEMORY ENTER CURSOR pu a Qe pep NUMBER Press a MEMORY BLOCK A G button then press a NUMBER 1 8 button to register the station at the desired preset channel e This completes registration If no bu
297. t specifications and design are subject to change without notice 164 List of preset codes Liste de codes pr r gl s DVD 3D Lab Acoustic Solutions Advent AEG AFK Afreey Aim Airis Aiwa Akai Akira Akura Alba Alco Allegro Amitech 40539 40713 41016 40770 41051 40698 40699 41250 40533 40690 41089 40699 41051 40539 40730 40790 40869 40770 Amphion Media Works Amstrad AMW Ansonic Apex Apex Digital Arianet Aspire Digital Audiosonic Audiovox Awa Axion B amp K Basic Line Baze Bellagio Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blue Parade Blue Sky Boghe Boman Brainwave Brandt Broksonic 40872 40713 40872 40774 40672 40672 40830 40770 41168 40690 40717 41122 40730 40730 40655 40713 41165 41004 40698 40717 40571 40651 40804 41004 40783 40770 40503 40695 40730 40790 40778 40641 40705 41115 40672 40783 40784 40831 41061 40717 41004 41407 41265 40790 40872 41071 40662 40713 40672 41115 40651 40868 41242 40833 40770 40695 41051 40850 40755 41020 41041 41072 40833 40695 Bush 40516 40717 41051 C Tech 40798 Cambridge Soundworks 40690 Cat 40699 41165 CAVS 41057 CCE 40730 Celestial 41020 40790 40884 40899 Centrex 40672 Centrum 40713 CGV 41115 Changhong 40627 40699 40713 40717 Cinea 40831
298. t memory lt lt Kl Auto search to beginning of track H Pause Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the MENO SC component you want to operate A V 4 gt Cursor up down left and right ENTER Enter 2 Operate the component DISP Display A CH Switch channels x For details refer to the component s operating 0 9 410 Number instructions f x Some models cannot be operated with this remote Default setting DVD control unit The preset codes of a DVDR can be recorded in the DVD mode so that the DVD recorder can be operated It is only possible to set the preset memory for either P the DVD or DVDR e For the DVD player remote control buttons function names may differ according to manufacturer Compare with the remote control operation of the various components 83 Advanced Operation 2 Satellite SAT tuner cable CABLE system buttons SRC ON Power on SRC OFF Power off SETUP Setup DISP Guide MENU Menu A V ak Cursor up down left and right ENTER Enter CH Switch channels 0 9 10 Number x When there are codes usable for the preset device those codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed If not by default the DVD codes are punched through If the punch through setting is made after the preset memory is set the codes are sent with priority lt lt gt gt Manual search forward and reverse E
299. tal In Assign ES page 99 100 and connections are correct and whether the component s power is turned on AL24 processing is activated when PCM signals are played while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO MULTI CH PURE DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT or MULTI CH IN NOTE e The DIG indicator will light when playing CD ROMs containing data other than audio signals but no sound will be heard 48 ROOM EQ Room EO function e The AVR 4806CI s Auto Setup Room EQ function offers three correction curves Audyssey Front Flat The timbre of the speakers can also be adjusted manually using a graphic equalizer Details of the different correction curves are described below Press the ROOM EO button The Room EO switches as follows each time the ROOM EQ button is pressed gt OFF Audyssey Front Flat Manual Xx The Audyssey is selected the MultEO XT indicator lights green The Front or Flat is selected the MultEO XT indicator lights red Xx The MultEQ XT indicator also lights red if the Speaker Configuration Delay Time Channel Level or Crossover Frequency is set manually after conducting the Auto Setup procedure Audyssey This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics Front This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of
300. te control unit Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER mode Press the RDS SEARCH button until PTY SEARCH appears on the display x The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display Watching the display press the CURSOR lt or gt button to call out the desired program type RDS PTY 1 Select category by 4 gt button ENTE INFORM TALK ROCK ADLT HIT TOP 40 SPORTS CLS ROCK SOFT RCK Next Down 2 Tune by preset Up CHB5 FM105 50MHz Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the PTY search operation ERD PT Y 1 Select category by 4 button INFORM TALK ROCK ADLT HIT TOP 40 Search SPORTS CLS ROCK SOFT RCK Next 2 Tune by preset UpjDown y f there is no station broadcasting the designated program type with above operation all the reception bands are searched The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops 69 Basic Operation To continue searching repeat step 3 Xx f no other station broadcasting the designated program type is found when all the frequencies are searched NO PROGRAMME is displayed RDS PTY 1 Select category by 4 button NEWS INFORM TALK ROCK ADLT HIT TOP 40 S CLS SOFT PORTS ROCK RCK Next
301. tected e Connect the measurement microphone to the microphone connector e Check the speaker connection Playing a DVD with Surround Sound 7 Disconnect the microphone from the unit 2 Select the input source to be played 3 Select the play mode 25 4 Start DVD playback 5 Adjust the volume Connecting Other Sources Cable indications e The hookup diagrams on the subsequent pages assume the use of the following optional connection cables not supplied Audio cable D Analog terminal Stereo het Com Red Pin plug cable D Analog terminal Monaural for subwoofer 1r Pin plug cable Ea Digital terminal Coaxial Orange m Coaxial cable 75 Q ohms pin plug cable DJ Digital terminal Optical Video cable D Video terminal Yellow el p Tip Video cable 75 Q ohms video pin plug cable Mi S Video terminal E 1 S Video cable Component video terminal Green Y Blue PB CB Red AE Bt PR CR Component video cable I3 DVI D terminal 24 pin DVI D cable Audio and Video cable HDMI terminal 19 pin HDMI cable Signal direction a Dlt D E Optical cable Optical fiber cable g DENON LINK terminal E e DENON LINK cable i IEEE1394 terminal B 4 pin S400 IEEE1394 cable D Speaker terminal ebe Speaker
302. tekom Wewa Wibo Wintel Wisi Woorisat Worldsat PRESET CODE 01142 00200 00455 00834 01206 00082 01446 00820 00321 00501 00114 00713 01291 01075 01429 00713 00136 00879 00157 01392 00052 00834 00132 01251 00114 00607 01535 01535 01161 00173 00369 00200 00114 00492 01105 00114 01162 00869 00421 00321 00157 00157 00455 00243 00299 00173 00455 00520 00114 01323 01442 00501 01207 00455 01501 01253 00351 00115 00853 01296 00713 01162 01640 00074 00200 00115 00675 00742 01206 00142 00351 00501 01161 00299 00501 00123 01480 01443 01444 00587 00592 00668 00713 01545 00486 00749 00790 01285 01516 01530 01749 01307 00372 00132 00200 00396 00501 01099 01113 01227 01251 00076 00238 00722 00724 00243 00173 00299 00397 00571 00742 01087 01099 01251 01251 01279 01283 00690 00710 00713 00690 00818 00605 00829 00321 00351 00372 00396 00607 00638 00690 00668 00710 01012 01251 Xcom Xcom Multimedia XMS Xrypton Xsat Xtreme Yes Zaunkonig Zehnder Zenith Zinwell Zodiac Zwergnase CD Acoustic Research ADC Adcom Advantage Aiwa Akai Arcam Audio Alchemy Audio Dynamics Audio Pro Audio Research Audio Technica Audiolab Audiomeca Audioton Bestar
303. ter PC edion MEI electronic Memorex emphis Metronic etz MGA GN Technology Micormay icromaxx Microsoft ind Minolta itsubishi Motorola TC Multitec ultitech Murphy yryad NAD aiko National ebula Electronics NEC Neckermann Nesco Neufunk Newave Nikkai Nikko 20278 20000 21781 20240 20642 20045 20035 20000 20037 20642 20278 20209 20035 21972 20209 20035 20000 20000 20048 20479 20072 20081 20037 20043 20240 20348 20209 21972 21972 20042 20000 20642 20035 20000 20037 20000 20000 20081 20104 20642 20162 20033 20035 20104 20081 20072 20209 20037 20072 20037 21278 20035 20072 20038 20278 20240 20162 20348 20037 20035 20104 229 20081 20240 20348 20041 20807 20048 20240 20072 20226 20037 20209 20278 20039 20081 20081 20209 20081 20209 20278 20348 20226 20642 20038 20037 20039 20162 20209 20162 20226 20043 20048 20278 20240 20038 20041 20278 20149 20642 20046 20047 20240 20348 20347 21562 20067 20081 20048 20067 8 Niveus Media Noblex Nokia Nordmende Northgate Novatronic Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Olympus Onida Onimax Onkyo Optimus Orbit Orion Osaki Osume Otake Otto Versand Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic
304. terminal coaxial or optical at Setting the Digital In Assignment IES page 99 TV Monitor jus DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A lA e Pr VIDEO allen OUT H TSN S VIDEO E r E OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL m Ur D AUDIO OUT Cam 6 NOTE When Through is set at Resolution under Setting the HDMI Out Setup use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 4801 5761 e f your monitor is not equipped with an HDMI terminal connect the AVR 4806CI to the monitor using the component video S Video or composite video terminals 28 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a TV tuner e For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your TV tuner S Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV tuner does not have component video inputs e To connect the digital audio output from the TV tuner you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the coaxial connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment 1287 page 99 TV tuner _ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT Connecting a DBS tuner e For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DBS tuner S Video and composite video outputs are also p
305. ternet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or later LAN port required e 300 MB or greater free hard disc space required x Extra free space is necessary to store music files The following table gives an approximate estimate of the required free space 5 Per one Format Bit rate minute Per one hour 128 kbps 1 MB 60 MB 192 kbps 1 5 MB 90 MB MP3 WMA 256 kbps 2MB 120 MB 392 kbps 3 MB 180 MB WAV LPCM 1400 kbps 10 MB 600 MB L Others When the contract with your provider is of the type by which the network settings are made manually you must make the Network Setup ES page 123 124 The AVR 4806Cl is not compatible with PPPoE If your contract is of the PPPoE setting type you need a PPPoE compatible router For some ISPs Internet Service Providers you may have to make proxy server settings in order to use the Internet radio function If proxy server settings for connecting to the Internet have been made on the computer make the same settings on the AVR 4806CI The AVR 4806CI is designed to make the network settings automatically using the DHCP and Auto IP functions 74 L TU Tuner DTU Digital tuner system buttons The tuner or digital tuner system buttons shown on the diagram below are used for Network Audio operations A E e Lei A G Preset memory blocks A Y Character search MODE Configuration mode selec
306. the audio temporarily The muting level is same as set with Volume Control e Cancelling muting mode Press the MUTE button again or press the VOLUME button on the remote control unit 93 Advanced Operation Advanced Operation Other function ZONE3 REC SELECT FUNCTION DIRECT STEREO INPUT MODE SURROUND MODE DIRECT STEREO SURROUND PHONES INPUT MODE O 1 ON SCREEN MODE o Playing Super Audio CDs with an IEEE 1394 When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT cable mode the DSD signals are converted into analog signals When playing in other surround modes the DSD signals are first converted into PCM signals The input signal and Select the input source to which IEEE1394 was playing status can be checked by pressing the ON SCREEN assigned at the IEEE1394 Assign CS page button on the remote control unit 102 in the system setup Example When DSD multi channel signals are played in he DIRECT mode Example CD Mode DSD MULTI DRCT FUNCTION RoomEQ OFF SIGNAL DSD FORMAT 3 2 1 Main unit Remote control unit e The IEEE1394 indicator lights se Example When DSD multi channel signals are played in po the 7CH STEREO mode Mode 7CH STEREO RoomEQ OFF 2 Select the surround mode SIGNAL DSD gt PCM Example DIRECT FORMAT 3 2 1 DIRECT STEREO u D S Main unit Remote control unit
307. the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment I page 99 e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with another set of input terminals for a non DVD Video Disc Player such as laser disc VCD SVCD or future high definition disc player The above connection guidelines for DVD also apply to the VDP input DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO OUT pO Pe PR HDMI H VIDEO ui O OUT H O CH S VIDEO eS OUT Al AUDIO OUT Ce di jP R D OPTICAL D OD d Tm COAXIAL x Audio signal flow is shown with white arrows white SH video signal flow is shown with gray arrows M SY Y Ga ES 17 Easy Setup and Operation e For best picture quality especially with progressive DVD and other high definition sources choose the component video or HDMI connection to your monitor or TV S Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV does not have component video inputs TV Monitor COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y PB Mie Pr sage HOM w Paice Bf pur AAA ne M D th E S VIDEO o o IN MONITOR H D 1 NOTE e The component video input and or output terminals may be labeled differently on some TVs monitors or video components Y PB Pr Y CB Cr Y BN R Y Check t
308. the front speakers Flat This the frequency response of all speakers flat This is suitable for multi channel music reproduction from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5 1 DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Manual Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EO Setup For details of the Manual EO Setup gt page 113 114 The Audyssey Front and Flat Room EQ curves can be selected after performing the Auto Setup procedure Basic Operation Playing modes for different sources e The AVR 4806CI is equipped with many surround modes We recommend using the surround modes as described below in order to achieve the maximum effect for the specific signal source x E is a 6 1 channel 7 1 channel surround mode Sources recorded in Dolby Digital Surround EX THX SURROUND EX ES page 52 Maximum performance for playing movies on the AVR 4806CI DOLBY DIGITAL EX PLIIx 2 ES page 54 e This mode is optimized for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Surround EX Sources recorded in DTS ES DTS ES DSCRT 6 1 MTRX 6 1 PLIIx 2 ES page 54 e This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in DTS ES ES DSCRT 6 1 THX ES MTRX 6 1 THX 1237 page 52 e When playing movies setting this mode sometimes results in a more natural sound Select the mode as desired Do
309. ther function Playing Super Audio CDs with an IEEE1394 cable 94 Multi source recording playback Playing one source while recording another RECO cle eee em 95 e Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel sources 95 Seele le El eS Last function memory Initialization of the microprocessor EH ROERSCH 03 Tuner Presets AMLO ES IM EAI NY ees 03 e Preset Skip 104 e Preset Name 105 Video Setup Setting the HDMI DVI In Aesionrment 106 107 Setting the Component ImAssigonment 07 SetMo he Madeo CAMS 107 Setting the HDMI Out Setup 108 109 SEmi NaNe AU NE EY ccc re 09 Ee HERE ee TEE 0 Advanced Playback SS inns wns 2cehiDrect E EE 111 Setting the Dolby Digital Setup 112 Se ringi ee AUTORS Umo ka ii o ree enre 2 Settinguthe Wan MIES pees ees 113 114 e Procedure for copying the Flat correction curve 114 Option Setup SettingsiesehannellsetJpee t 115 Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment 1160 117 Settinalinewo me co o 8 Setting the Trigger Out ZONE2 and ZONES tone control and channel level setting 120 Sennone Digital OutrAssionment e eee ene 21 ET ue 2l ET 22 Network Setup Snine ne PA iii ES 123 SENO EE er 24 Setingitne e S DO 24 Advanced Setup Part 2 Speaker Setup SSM WAVE WOVE EE 126 Setting the low frequency distribution S 127 Same WES
310. tically changes over the input to the selected signals ANALOG EXT IN or IEEE1394 e Refer to DENON LINK connections I page 34 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR or gt button to select DLINK 3 1 Digital In Assign CD COAXI Tape OPT4 Dvo DIEI Vaux OPTS VDP COAX3 TV OPTI DBS OFF DLINK WI OPT2 No Signal VCR 2 OPT3 4EXT IN gt VCR 3 OFF De f au Ugen Press the CURSOR or V button to select DLINK setting then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input signal ANALOG EXT IN or IEEE1394 3 1 Digital In Assign CD COAX1 Tape OPT4 DVD DLINK VAx OPT5 VDP COAX3 Tv OPTI DBS OFF GDLINK VCR OPT2 No Signal VCR2 OPT3 4ANALOG VCR3 OFF Defaul tiYes 4 f the signal cannot be played with DENON LINK connection the signal automatically switches to the input from the set terminal Setting the EXT IN Setup e Set the method of playback of the analog input signal connected to the EXT IN 8CH terminal Refer to Connecting the external inputs EXT IN terminals 1 page 30 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select EXT IN Setup at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the
311. timal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay L THX Music Mode For the replay of 5 1 multi channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected In this mode new THX processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage 152 L THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field L ASA Advanced Speaker Array ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provi
312. ting e The Channel Level screen reappears e To cancel the settings press the CURSOR lt button to select Level Clear and Yes on the Channel Level screen then make the settings again 2 4 Channel Level Test Tone Nm Manual Surr Sp p B A B Test Tone Start Yes GLevel Clear Ma 129 Advanced Setup Part 2 When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system you may also need to adjust the subwoofer s own volume control When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode the channel level adjustments made will affect all surround modes Consider this mode a Master Channel Level adjustment mode After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes Then whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround mode IG page 64 65 You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO DOLBY DTS SURROUND HOME THX CINEMA 7CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME and MATRIX When using either surround speakers A or B
313. tion MEMO Preset and favorite registration A V ak Cursor up down left and right ENTER Enter settings CH Preset channel selection 1 8 Preset numbers RC 1038 O Connections Connect one side of the Ethernet cable CAT 5 to the ETHERNET terminal on the AVR 4806CI s rear panel the other side to the router Internet radio ETHERNET To WAN side To LAN side port To LAN side port A Router LAN port ETHER Computer FUNCTION ENTER CURSOR L Network settings When using a broadband router DHCP function the network settings are made automatically so there is no need to make the settings from the setup menu If the broadband router s DHCP function is turned off make the Network Setup ES page 123 124 Listening to Internet radio he required system connections and settings must be made in order to listen to Internet radio Update appears on the display when connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time Either turn the FUNCTION knob or press the AUX button to select NetAudio AMP mode he Network Audio menu screen appears FUNCTION Main unit Network Audio Favorites Remote control unit in the AMP mode Internet Radio Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Internet Radio then press t
314. tness step increase Press the CHANNEL button For 1 brightness step increase Press the CHANNEL button Press and hold the RC SETUP button to exit programming The IR segment twice as confirmation 88 Resetting L Resetting the single learned button 1 2 3 4 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 6 button 9 7 6 The IR segment blinks twice Press the MODE SELECTOR button Press the learned button you want to reset twice e The IR segment blinks twice Xx Other key can be deleted by repeating steps 1 to 4 L Resetting the learned buttons 1 2 3 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 6 button 9 7 6 The IR segment blinks twice Press the MODE SELECTOR button you want to reset twice The IR segment blinks twice L Resetting the system call buttons 1 Eh CN Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 8 button 9 gt 7 8 The IR segment blinks twice Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 to 3 you want to reset Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds to clear the system call The IR segment blinks twice L Resetting the punch through setting 1 1 Press the MODE SELECTOR button TV or SAT CBL you
315. to select Function Rename at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Function Rename screen 3 Audio Input Setup 3 4 Function Rename 1 Digital In Assign 2 EXT IN Setup GR 4TUNER gt 3 Input Function Lev Phono PHONO m4 Function Rename cD CD 5 IEEE1394 Assign TAE TAPE 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func e CDR TAP 7 Tuner Presets VDP VDP Exit wl TV Ly Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source whose name you want to change then press the CURSOR lt or gt button e The screen switches to the character input screen Example When DVD is selected and the CURSOR lt or P button is pressed 3 4 Function Rename Default Yesd Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to move the cursor Bi to the character number symbol or punctuation mark you wish to input and press the CURSOR or V button to select that character ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy 20123456789 I 965 amp 22 Q space Xx Up to 8 characters can be input 4 Repeat step 3 to input the input source name Advanced Setup Part 1 X To reset the input source name to the default value press the CURSOR lt or gt button to highlight the input source display then press the CURSOR V button Wh
316. to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 51 Basic Operation O Surround parameters 1 DECODER Select the decoder to be used when playing 2 channel sources in the Home THX Cinema mode PLIIx C The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing PLII C The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing PL The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic mode before undergoing THX processing NEO 6 C The signals are decoded in the NEO 6 Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing MODE SB CH OUT Select the surround back channel playback method or mode e ON This is the recommended play mode for using the surround back channel when DTS NEO 6 is selected e OFF This is the recommended play mode when Dolby Pro Logic Il is selected The surround back channel is not played L Checking the input signal e The input signal can be checked by pressing the remote control unit s ON SCREEN button CS page 12 SIGNAL Displays the type of signal DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PCM etc fs Displays the input signal s sampling frequency FORMAT Displays the input signal s number of channels Number of front channels Number of surround channels LFE on off SURROUND is displayed for 2 channel signal sources recorded in Dolby Surround OFFSET Displays the
317. ton for at least three seconds The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 8 4 button 9 8 4 to select punch through setting e The IR segment blinks twice 87 Advanced Operation Select the MODE SELECTOR button CD DVD or VCR you want to punch through Press the button you want to punch through gt B lt gt gt 1 44 PI or ID 5 Repeat step 4 Press the MODE SELECTOR button TV or SAT CBL for which you want to set the punch through Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Setting the back light s lighting time 1 2 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 3 button 9 7 3 to select Light setup The IR segment blinks twice Press the NUMBER button 1 to 5 you want to adjust the lighting time 5 sec 25 sec L Lighting time 1 5sec 2 10 sec factory default 3 15 sec 4 20 sec 5 25 sec The IR segment blinks twice as confirmation Advanced Operation IR segment SYSTEM CALL po 08 8 8 MODE SELECTOR Setting the brightness e Th e The default brightness setting is level 3 level 5 brightest 1 2 1 2 2 e brightness of the display can be adjusted in 5 levels Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice For 1 brigh
318. tton is operated for approximately ten seconds the regular display reappears Registered presettings can be checked on the on screen display The presettings can only be displayed with the on screen display when the NetAudio function is selected NOTE eRegistered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten L Listening to preset Internet radio stations When the NetAudio function is selected press a MEMORY BLOCK A G button then press a NUMBER 1 8 button e The connection is made automatically and playback starts Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites e Your favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen so registered stations can be tuned in easily 7 Press the MEMORY button while playing the Internet radio station you want to register e The registration menu screen appears Favorites Preset GFavorites Preset Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Favorites then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e The favorites registration screen appears Favorites Is it registered lt Add Cancel gt 3 Press the CURSOR 1 button to register the station To cancel without registering press the CURSOR gt button L Listening to Internet radio stations registered in your favorites 1 When the NetAudio function is selected press the CURSOR or V button to select Favorites then press the ENTER or CURSOR
319. tup menu then press the ENTER button Display the Video Convert Mode screen 4 Video Setup 4 3 Video Convert Mode HDMI DVI In Assign 1 2 Component In Assig eo a 53 Video Convert Mode Tv ON 4 HDMI Out Setup DBS ON 5 Audio Delay ver ON 6 On Screen Display VRZ ON y VcR 3 ON Exit VAux ON Press the CURSOR or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF No ON When there are multiple input signals the input signals are detected and the input signal to be output from the video monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order component video S Video composite video OFF The convert function does not operate The video signal input from the video input terminal is only output to the video monitor out terminal The S Video signal input from the S Video input terminal is only output to the S Video monitor out terminal The component input signal input from the component input terminals is only output to the component monitor output terminals Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears i e Down converting from the component video signal to the S Video and composite video signal is possible only when the resolution of a component video si
320. uctions refer to the manuals of the respective components P e The signals of the source selected in the ZONE3 mode are also output from the VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 and CDR TAPE recording output terminals e Digital signals are not output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals e About the MULTI ZONE connections IS page 90 91 e Digital outputs of the OPTICAL2 3 and 4 OUT normally switch in association with the ZONE3 REC SELECT mode but if ZONE2 SELECT is selected at Digital Out Assign the source switches in association with the ZONE2 SELECT mode for the OPTICAL2 OUT digital output terminal ES page 121 92 Remote control unit operations during multi source playback Select the zone which you want to operate pressing the AMP buttons Example ZONE2 RO AM Remote control unit 2 Press the ON button to turn on the zone power x Press the OFF button to turn off the zone power 3 Select the input source you wish to output The volume of the outputs of the different zones can be adjusted with the VOLUME button on the remote control unit The output level can be controlled only if the zone volume level is set variable at Volume Control in the System Setup Menu IZ amp page 118 x DEFAULT VOLUME SETTING ZONE2 40 dB ZONE3 40 dB The zone volume can be adjusted within the range of 80 to 18 dB in steps of 1 dB I e Press the MUTE button to mute
321. um 40591 40713 40741 40869 LiteOn 41158 41416 41440 Urban Concepts 40503 Loewe 40741 US Logic 40839 agnavox 40646 V 41064 Mitsubishi 41403 Venturer 40790 ustek 41730 Vestel 40713 EC 41404 Vieta 40705 Panasonic 40490 Vinc 41064 41226 Philips 40646 41158 Vizio 41064 41226 Pioneer 40631 Vocopro 41027 Polaroid 41086 Voxson 40690 40730 40774 40831 RCA 40522 Walkvision 40717 Samsung 40490 Welkin 40831 Sensory Science 41158 Wellington 40713 Sharp 40675 Wesder 40699 Sony 41033 41431 Wharfedale 40698 40752 40768 40790 Sylvania 40675 Wilson 40831 Zenith 40741 Windsor 40713 Windy Sam 40573 VCR WIZE 41115 ABS MISA Xbox 40522 Accent 20072 Xenius 40651 40790 Admiral 20048 20209 20479 XLogic 40768 40798 Adventura 20000 XMS 40770 Adyson 20072 Xoro 41173 41250 Aiko 20278 Yakumo 41004 41056 Aim 20209 20278 20642 Yamada 40872 41004 41056 41158 Aiwa 20000 20032 20037 20124 20209 20315 Yamaha 40490 40539 40545 40646 20348 20479 Yamakawa 40872 Akai 20037 20041 20081 20175 20240 20315 Yukai 40730 41730 20348 20642 Zenith 40503 40591 40741 40869 Akashi 20072 Zeus 40784 Akiba 20072 Zoece 41265 Akura 20072 Alba 20000 20072 20081 20209 20278 20315 DVDR 20348 Apex Digital 41056 Alienware 21972 Aspire Digital 41168 Allstar 20081 Coby 41086 America Action 20278 5 PRESET CODE American High 20035 Craig 20037 20047 20072 20240 Amoisonic 20479 Crown 20037 20072 20278 Amstrad 20000 20072 202
322. up Room EQ peaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup Advanced Playback Option Setup Network Setup xit Screen title Sub menu title TT MO Cn RR wn ES stem Setup Menu 1 Auto Setup Room EA 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E Fr c To select a menu press the CURSOR A or V button Option Setup Network Setup xit AA Input Setup No Gmi Digital In Assign EXT IN Setup i d t Functi Lev Screen title nput Function Lev Function Rename IEEE1394 Assign IEEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit Sub menu title TT O Cn NI 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphone at ear height at Press the CURSOR lt button main listening position to execute ML ee Setupt Currently selected line 41 9 is t a r KO Cancel Digital In Assign Ne 9 4l Tae OPTA COAX2 VAx OPT5 COAX3 OPTI OFF OPT2 OPT3 OFF Current setting The settings are changed with the CURSOR lt or E button Currently selected line 253 Delay Time Set The Distance To Each Speakers Do You Prefer In Meters In Feet Select either o
323. urround sound Once the combinations of surround mode A LBY GA S 6 Speaker speakers to be used for the different surround 131 132 Setup modes are preset the surround speakers are e d selected automatically according to the apelar A A A A A A A surround mode When using a THX Ultra2 compatible Boundary Gain subwoofer set the subwoofer s frequency THX Ultra2 Subwoofer NO 132 A compensation 7 THX Audio response Setup Surround Back y KWA Speaker ah Nee bi priae ae Se els The Distance Between SBL SBR 0 ft to 1 ft 0 m to 0 3 m 133 Position set the distance of the two speakers 138 Audio Input Setup Advanced Setup Part 2 Audio Input Setup Default settings Page mM m Input c5 pvp vop Tv ops VCR I VCR2 vers HI vaux Digital In This assigns the digital input terminals for the Source TAPE 99 100 Assign different input sources Digital I COAX1 COAX2 COAX3 OPT 1 OFF OPT2 OPT3 OFF OPT4 OPTS nputs EXT IN Setup Set the Ext In terminal playback method Surr Sp Surr A SW Level 15dB 100 CDR Input The playback level is corrected individually for the different TUNER PHONO CD 7 5 DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VAUX
324. utton to select SE Surround Back Speaker Position at the THX Audio Setup screen then press the ENTER button 2 7 THX Audio Setup Boundary Gain Compensation Surround Back Speaker Position Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the settings according to the distances of the two surround back speakers 127 page 127 L11 then press the ENTER button Return to the THX Audio Setup screen 2 7 THX Audio Setup Set The distance Between SBL SBR H Oft to Tft Om to 0 3m Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e Return to the Speaker Setup menu screen 2 7 THX Audio Setup Boundary Gain Compensation Surround Back Speaker Position GExit 133 Advanced Setup Part 2 Others Setup Setting the Room EQ Setup e Select the setting of an Equalizer that has been set with Auto Setup or Manual EQ 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Room EQ Setup at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Room EO Setup screen Auto Setup Room EQ _ Auto Setup 1 2 Room EQ Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check Relation To The Surround Mode ATI gt Assign Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select All or Assign All Sets the Equalizer for
325. ver Frequency 4 Advanced gt Front Large GCenter Small 40H Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Noe S Back Small 12 OHz gt LFE 8 OHz gt e f LFE Main is set at Subwoofer Setup the frequencies can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes e This menu is displayed when both surround speakers A and B are used e At this screen preset the surround speakers to be used in each surround modes 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Surround Sp Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e Display the Surround Sp Setup screen 2 Speaker Setup Speaker Confit 2 6 Surround Sp Setup 1 2 Subwoofer Setup FB A B Se Time MUSIC A B A B 4 Channel Level GAME R B A B 5 Crossover Frequenc WIDE SCREEN A B A B G6 Surround Sp Setup rel STEREO B A B Ee DSP SIMULATION f B A B MULTI CH MODE B A B M Advanced Setup Part 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the surround mode then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the surround speaker A When surround speakers A is used B When surround speakers B is used A B When both surround speakers A and B are used Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears P e For the WIDE SCREE
326. vies with the whole family move the microphone successively to the different positions in which the members of the family sit m on the diagram indicates the points of installation and measure repeatedly Example Even if the number of people using the home theater is small taking multiple measurements at or near the listening positions makes it possible to correct the sound more effectively Example The AVR 4806CI s Room EO function offers three correction curves Audyssey Front and Flat These can be selected after performing the auto setup procedure Details of the different correction curves are described below Audyssey This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics Front This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers Flat This the frequency response of all speakers flat This is suitable for multi channel music reproduction from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5 1 DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD To make the Speaker system settings without using the Auto Setup function IGS page 125 133 19 L About the main listening position M The main listening position is the point where a listener sits most often or the listening position when only one person is listening Measurements on the AVR 4806CI start from this point Correction for the speaker distance Delay Time is set b
327. want to reset Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds e The IR segment blinks twice 2 Press the 9 8 4 button 9 8 4 to select a setting e The IR segment blinks twice 4 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds to reset the punch through setting e The IR segment blinks twice L All reset function Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least three seconds The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 8 1 button 9 gt 8 1 The IR segment blinks four times Clear the entire system memory which will restore the remote control unit to the factory default settings Xx Only use this if you wish to clear all customized settings and memories and restore the unit to its out of the box factory default settings 89 Advanced Operation Advanced Operation Multi zone music entertainment system e When the outputs of the ZONE2 ZONE3 OUT terminals are wired and connected to power amplifiers installed in other rooms different sources can be played in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE in which this unit and the playback devices are installed Refer to ZONE2 ZONE3 on the diagram below e Settings can be made at Power Amp Assign in the System Setup Menu so that the same source as the ZONE2 ZONE3 pre out terminals can be played from the speakers connected to the ZONE2 ZONES speaker terminals I page 116 117 e When a sold separately room t
328. with digital outputs PCM type digital output required DTS surround track playback offers the same intricate grand sound as in a movie theater right in your own listening room DTS compatible media and playback methods DIGITAL EUM and EIS Marks indicating DTS compatibility The following are general examples Also refer to the player s operating instructions X1 X2 X3 Additional Information DTS signals are recorded in the same way on CDs and LDs as PCM signals Because of this the un decoded DTS signals are output as random hissy noise from the CD or LD player s analog outputs If this noise is played with the amplifier set at a very high volume it may possibly cause damage to the speakers To avoid this be sure to switch the input mode to AUTO or DTS before playing CDs or LDs recorded in DTS Also never switch the input mode to ANALOG or PCM during playback The same holds true when playing CDs or LDs on a DVD player or LD DVD compatible player For DVDs the DTS signals are recorded in a special way so this problem does not occur The signals provided at the digital outputs of a CD or LD player may undergo some sort of internal signal processing output level adjustment sampling frequency conversion etc In this case the DTS encoded signals may be processed erroneously in which case they cannot be decoded by the AVR 4806CI or may only produce noise Before playing DTS signals for the
329. x When the SB CH OUT parameter is set to ON Set SP Back at the System Setup to 1spkr or 2spkrs Display Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode Pro Logic IIx Music mode Pro Logic IIx Game mode X When the SB CH OUT parameter is set to OFF Set SP Back at the System Setup to None Display Pro Logic II Cinema mode Pro Logic II Music mode Pro Logic II Game mode Dolby Pro Logic mode Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters Example DOLBY PLIIx Music mode screen DOLBY PLIIx enin i DOLBY PLIIx MUSIC at o OPTIONAL PARAMETERS oa ag S D COMP e Su ES D COME PANORAMA CR 4 gt 55 SB cu our DIMENSION 3 am N vr CENTER WIDTH 43 gt Default Yes X When set with the on screen display using the remote control unit while in the MUSIC mode set the mark to OPTIONS lt 4 pressing the CURSOR A or V button then press the CURSOR lt button Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameters setting Xx DEFAULT setting Press the CURSOR lt button to select Default Yes lt then parameters set to default setting OLBY PLIIx MODE XI 4 PLITx CINEMA CINEMA E Q 4 OFF Ww D COMP orl
330. x x x x x x x x 193410 38Nd H9 LNW x O x x x X x x x x x x x x x x 3ufd IANN asa O x x x x x x x ps x x x x x x x 193810 3ufld ASA x x O O x O O O O O O O O O O O 93810 34Nd 3810 38Nd x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x Le JISNW SU MT 193810 IN x O P3 x O x x x x ps ps x x x x x Cx VIN3NID vU Id 193810 x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x 193810 HO LEY x O E x ps ps x X X ps x x x ps x x 193810 LAW asd O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 193810 asd x x Q O x O Si O O O O O O O O O 193810 93810 ez to ramas zet A52 tura PO WE AT TELS PHARA peu am we erg exw 1 Gey mim asa asa Ar 9L DDT Ou Agog Agog Agoa wun Agen X3 1v11910 A9100 Sid Sld XAL S3 S10 14950 S3 S10 WANN 901VNV 910N po punong Q2 olpny sedng Olanv dAa IVLIDIG Ag 1OQ sla sjeuBis indu uonng 160 Additional Information Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the video convert mode settings MAIN ZONE Video convert bal ar MONITOR OUT HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x x x x x x x x x x Oo VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO x x O x S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO x x O Oo S VIDEO
331. your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency Some subwoofers have a standby mode Be sure to turn this function off before performing the Auto Setup procedure Turn on your TV monitor L N Press the POWER switch mm ON The power turns on and the power indicator lights Set the POWER switch to this position to turn the power on and off from the included remote control unit A OFF The power turns off and indicator is off In this position the power cannot be turned on and off from the remote control unit Press the ON STANDBY switch on the main unit or ON button on the remote control unit When pressed the power turns on and the display lights When pressed again the power turns off the standby mode is set and the display turns off The sound is muted for several seconds after which the unit operates normally Whenever the ON STANDBY button is in the standby state the apparatus is still connected to the AC line voltage Please be sure to turn off the POWER switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for say a vacation 5 Press the AMP button to select AMP only when operating with the remote control unit 21 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button e Display the System Setup Menu MiSystem Setup Menu D 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E Option

Denon AVR-4806CI User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents